Home

Pelco C624M-C User's Manual

Contents

1. Button Name Description Live Enters the display mode and opens the DX8000 main window where live and playback video is displayed A e Live Mode Allows all users to view live video e Playback Mode Allows users with Standard User access and higher to play back recorded video Search Enters the Search mode and opens the search window providing access to search features Users with al Standard User access and higher are allowed to search video data using specific criteria Setup Enters the setup mode and opens the Setup dialog box to the Camera page default view and allows access to the other pages Users with Power User access and higher are allowed to set up the features and options for the DVR Export Enters the export mode where you configure the export options and parameters s Print Enters the print mode where you print the selected video image Q Single Division Displays one camera EHI 4 Division Displays four cameras at a time quad display ES 9 Division Displays nine cameras at a time ES 16 Division Displays 16 cameras at a time ES 25 Division Displays 25 images Each DVR accommodates up to 16 cameras You can display images from the local and 25 remote DX8000 DVRs 35 36 Division Displays 36 images Each DVR accommodates up to 16 cameras You can display images from the local and 36 remote DX8000 DVRs ES 6 10 13 Division Displays images as follows e 6Division 1 5 One larger
2. DL J I i os Figure 38 Playback Timeline The following table describes the parts of the playback timeline control Table V Parts ofthe Playback Timeline Control 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 i Item Part Item Part Currently displayed view panel o Selected second Total number of view windows Increase timeline detail Site number Decrease timeline detail Camera number Alarm recording Camera name Normal recording Selected date Motion detection recording Selected hour Timeline slider o00 0 0 00 Selected minute o 00 0 9G O69 Instant recording The playback timeline is used to select a day and time to begin playback The timeline includes a horizontal slider that can be moved to select playback time over a 24 hour period Time periods containing recorded video are represented as color coded segments of the timeline The following figure illustrates the timeline color coding scheme C624M C 5 06 PLAYING BACK VIDEO BY TIME This section describes how to play back video by time The time is displayed in 24 hour clock format You can select the time by moving the slider along the timeline This section includes the following topics e Starting Playback from a Specific Point in Time on page 65 e Understanding Instant Playback on page 65 STARTING PLAYBACK FROM
3. TI POS Transaction Search by Device Name escoger ead pene PR EY Ru Re dada dw de ba da adu P dade rv 80 Display a POS Transaction Search by Device Name iiiisisissssssssssssssssss e I re 81 Searching an POS Event by Transaction Number l iiisssssssssssssssssssss s e e e 82 Searching for Transaction with Exception Only Events 2 20 00 0000 cen I ne 83 Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exception Filters 2 0 0 0 nbn e 84 Transactions that Contain a Unique Line Item 2 II he 86 Searching Transactions by Action Code 20 nnn ela 87 Pixel S arch Scream bdo na dla 88 Thumbnail Images Marking Pixel Changes oooooooooooococo IIR ee tne e nee ee 89 Bookmark Controls ecards ei ear d ettet p UP oe ena s eit s 91 Setting aiStarting BOOKMALK soon dientes 92 Removing a Single BookMark ia des 92 9 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 o C9 Oc OC C c cC c c ac A la l3 l L3 iol LE ll x 3o 2 A A cux a Co Y 0201 4 C02 CO0cCcOCO 40525001 2 CO ho 121 122 123 Ist lling a USB flash ir Str eee b ee e ER ERE ENDE S da di 93 Enabling the Deinterfacing Filter from the Export Video Dialog BOX oooooooooooooorror rr 94 Export ideo al BO fs oae date aha tette aS notat to det talent aos 95 Exporting selected Videi s
4. 4 Click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels where you want the recording mode to apply Drag the mouse diagonally to highlight periods across multiple camera channels simultaneously 5 Click Apply amp Record Mode JB Normal Wl Motion Wi Alam PF ATM PO0S 1 Cancel Apply i Figure 89 Filling In Recording Blocks in Schedule Grid C624M C 5 06 Clearing a Scheduled Recording The DX8000 Schedule feature allows you to do the following For one or multiple channels clear scheduled recording times for a specific record mode at the same time You can select one channel or you can drag and select a group of channels For example you can drag and select the recording times for channel 1 2 3 4 16 However the system does not allow you to select random channels from the list For example you are not allowed to select channel 1 2 and 4 Notice that in this list camera 3 is not selected For one or multiple channels you can clear the scheduled recording times for all record modes simultaneously You can select and clear recording times periods in increments of 30 minutes to 24 hours This section describes how to clear a scheduled recording and includes the following sections Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode on page 125 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes on page 126 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode To clear t
5. BP x m Device r Tife Range 5 6 Optical Drive statday startin end Day End Time E 9 CD R RW ili 02102004 052700 02310 2004 07 06 00 f ch01 021004 052700 O EJCO TEAC CD W552E 2 02102049 oE 82 02302004 1319549 chor 021004 104201 Ei DVD R RW L13 0210 2004 1615 00 0210 2004 17 36 40 chO1 021004 181500 E Not Installed O4 02102004 212841 02102004 223900 ch01 21004 212041 B HDD B 63 Local Drives Not Installed E Remote Drives Not Installed Date tem_ Fle Name es r Export Format 4 6 Av C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF IV Audio Record JV Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous gt Refresh Create folder tend Figure 65 Export Time Range ASSIGNING A CUSTOM EXPORT VIDEO FILE NAME By default the DX8000 assigns a file name to each time range When the video channel selected is exported the file is assigned the name appearing in the Name column r Time Range s StatDay StartTi EndDay EndTme Name O1 10132004 080000 10132004 08 02 00 chDl 101304 D80000 101304 080200 02 10132004 101500 10132004 10 16 00 chDl I01304 101500 101304 101600 C13 10132004 130000 10132004 130200 chD1 ID1304 130000 101304 130200 L 14 10132004 1400 00 10132004 14 41 06 chDl I01304 140000 101304 144106 05 10132004 16 00 00 10132004 160500 chDl I01304 160000 101304 160500 MA 10132004 17 00 00 10132004 1
6. 00 00 cece cece eee cence Parts of the PTZ OSD Menu Control 2 2 0 2 t e KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features 20 02 00 ccc EEEa KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features 2 0 t ln Parts of the Playback Controls 2 2 0 0 t rre Parts of the Playback Speed and Volume Controls n nananana cence teen ee Parts of the Playback Timeline Control 2 2 nent re Parts of the Digital Zoom Control cons rte RR Ve xc a ehe VR EE A ee rea a ke Parts of the DX8000 Window in Search Mode oooooooococoocococo recorrer rr rr Paitsot the POS Search VIBW ors 5x ts A Edd Ges IR ub adii raum a Rad Rote Y Bookmark Gontiols ror tipa a eau tg qe Pata Jute ted aceti ES AyallaBle Babkup Spabe s cds pisces b T AP IR tied abe Eeus dir lap es pid Ic imend daa mel RENE EXPO FORTES d ioc ten Rabie et Ober inisetUr mies E Adm tc e uU RE RAE EIU EIE Parts of the DX8000 Setup Dialog Box 2 6 0 nnn een 1 Parts of the Schedule Page 1 Recordi MOdES cereias odes oet atten art ater o datada 1 Camera Settings for the Supported Recording Modes 20 0000 0 ccc cee cette eens 1 Resolution E LC TEL 1 Frame Rate Capacity cesses eeu ee e eR yas xe n wg EIE a a aaa 1 Motion Activated Relay Settings 2 0 0 0 nec een 1 AlarmsActivated Relay Settlngs redeo t Ree eed per Iq eue e DG de N quee ha Rue YR eee Re da 1 ATM POS Activated Relay Settings iiiiiisiiisssssssssssssssssss II e e 1
7. 6 Click Apply r Esport Import Configuration C Export Browse Export Now a Import Browse Import Now A Camera T Linking F User F Monitor F Em Part Backup F osp ATM PoS JZ Se Figure 128 Import DX8000 Server Configuration Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Import To import a settings file from a specific drive or folder 1 From the DX8000 menu bar choose Edit gt Import Setup The DX8000 Setup File Import Dialog box opens 2 Select the folder where the file resides that you want to import 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 4 Click the settings file you want to open 5 Click Open C624M C 5 06 USING SYSTEM LOGS The DX8000 automatically stores system information in a number of log files Users with Power User access and higher can use these files to track system statistics and monitor security The DX8000 allows you to view DX8000 activity log and Windows OS log files This section describes how to use the system logs and includes the following topics e Viewing a Log File on page 185 e Exporting Log Information on page 187 The following table list the DX8000 and Windows OS log views Table BA DX8000 Activities Windows OS Log Files DX8000 Log View Windows OS Log View System On Off Success System Failure Error Export Warning Backup Information Network Connection Audit Sucess Login ID List with Time
8. Figure 94 Month View Page Multi Day Schedule C624M C 5 06 Creating Single Day Schedules This section describes how to create a single day schedule and includes the following topics Working with Single Day Schedules on page 129 Copying and Applying Schedule Attributes on page 130 Working with Single Day Schedules Custom Mode schedules are defined for single days only A custom scheduled day can be set to recur on the same day of every month or the same day every year To set the DVR to record on a specific day if 2 C624M C 5 06 From the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected Select Custom Mode from the drop down box Click New The New File Name dialog box opens Enter a new file name for the profile The profile file names follow the standard Windows file naming conventions Click OK Select Once Per Month or Once Per Year Select the date range for the custom schedule a Setthe start date with the Start spinner buttons The start date cannot be set later than the end date b If you want the schedule to recur indefinitely deselect the Finish on End Date check box c Set the end date with the End spinner buttons Click the date on the calendar you want to schedule Select the recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule Refer to S
9. liiis sss 150 Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties 2 0 0 0 III le 50 Selecting the ATMZPOS Device Mode iain deese Tp lt ERR Pipe E Rp ut be eo Dea Tip 150 C624M C 5 06 C624M C 5 06 Setting Up an ATM POS Data Forrmnat cL v Reve LEE Reb X EET ei x Sa 151 Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device 20 0 cect en 154 Setting Up ATM POS EXCODLOFIS uretra pa daa ope ot Nip sre 155 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection ooooooocococococo coo ence n 159 Recording ATM POS EVBERES cc deis e tn tr e ee dete tel tag o 160 setting Up the KBD30DA Keyboard so too ic eO HR MARSA acho UA RAE TA De PENNE NES EASES 161 Configuring KBD300A Communication Settings iiiiisssssssssssssssssses IRI 182 KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features liiiisisssssssssssssssss IR 182 KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features ooooooooooocococo conocer II ne 163 Installing or Updating Device Protocols iiiisssssssssssssssssss IRR s s s n 163 Data Backup Setup em de Renee tm ERIT E Vasu edd ERE A ah RE EUER ERES 64 Accessing the Backup Configuration Page 165 Adding a Backup schedule sesse eec ertt rmi a ce efe i o lis 166 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule sena aora pia etes 167 Deleting an Existing Backup Schedule 5 3 et ve es D m TV erp RU AG 168 Initrating an Instant Backup Schedula wwe gee tows te dat ee a AX ee EC e Wee as ee 168 Mapping a Network DE
10. Allows you to configure the user to be automatically logged on to the DX8000 C624M C 5 06 BUILT IN USER ACCOUNTS There are two built in user accounts that come preconfigured on the DX8000 and they cannot be deleted or changed e Guest The Guest account provides limited access to the system The Guest user can view live video but cannot play back recorded video or access system configuration functions The Guest account automatically becomes active when the system is first started and each time a user logs out The Guest user is not a member of any group however Guest retains all of the rights and privileges of the Restricted Users group with the exception of the ability to view low security cameras e Admin The Admin account has full access to the system The Admin user can view live and play back video access all configuration settings add and modify users and can perform searches and backups The Admin user is a member of the Administrators group and cannot be removed DEFINITION OF USER ACCESS LEVELS There are four predefined user access levels or groups User access levels range from the Administrator group to the Restricted group By default the system starts up with a default Guest account The Admin can assign automatic login for a specified user For information about setting up auto login refer to Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User on page 177 The Guest account has Restricted user access The follow
11. Cancel Apply 8 Figure 145 Sending E Mails to Groups C624M C 5 06 Administering the DX8000 This section describes how to perform DX8000 system administration and includes the following topics e Updating the DX8000 Server and Client Applications on page 212 e Recovering a Password on page 215 UPDATING THE DX8000 SERVER AND CLIENT APPLICATIONS From time to time software updates may be made available for both the DX8000 server and client applications These updates will be free and will be made available on compact disc from Pelco When an update is issued it must be loaded onto a single DX8000 Series DVR server Once installed on a server the updates will be automatically distributed to clients on the same network when the client applications are started Remote DX8000 severs can be updated from a local DVR using the Software Upgrade utility To start the update process 1 From the DX8000 menu bar choose File Software Upgrade E DX8000 File Edit View Export Favorite Help me arras Unplug Eject Hardware Exit Figure 146 Software Upgrade Server Console 2 The Select Upgrade Package dialog box opens Select Upgrade Package ci xj Package Information Version none Package Date none File Path Package Selected oO Browse Next Exit Figure 147 Select Upgrade Package 3 Click Browse The Open dialog bo
12. In the drop down box select the type of schedule you want to change Options are as follows e All days e Weekdays e Weekends e Custom Mode In the drop down box select a profile that is different from the one you want to delete This step is necessary because you cannot delete a schedule profile that is currently active Click Apply In the drop down box select the profile that you want to delete Click Delete Click Apply Q View Year View D days Qs New Save Delete IS ED Once Per Month Finish on End Date Once Per Year T n Start v 2005 rz End v 2005 paa e ick July 2005 Figure 98 Month View Page C624M C 5 06 WORKING WITH CUSTOM CAMERA SETTINGS This section describes how to configure customized camera settings and includes the following topics Configuring Custom Camera Settings on page 133 Examples of Custom Camera Settings on page 134 Configuring Custom Camera Settings Each camera can be configured with custom recording settings To customize camera settings for normal motion alarm or ATM POS recording 1 2 C624M C 5 06 On the DX8000 toolbar click El The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Schedule page is displayed Click the plus 4 sign next to a camera in the Site tree Select a recording mode from one of the following options e Normal e Motion e Alar
13. 24 Export Menu The following table describes the DX8000 Export menu commands Table E Export Menu Commands Command Description Interrupt Export Immediately concludes an export process If the Interrupt Export command is executed before the scheduled backup time the system will save the backed up data up until the time the Interrupt Export command is executed Cancel Export Immediately cancels the export process and no backed data retained Favorite Menu The following table describes the DX8000 Favorite menu commands Table F Favorite Menu Commands Command Description Add to Favorites Opens the Add to Favorites dialog box where you create a favorite and store the favorite to a specified folder Organize Favorites Opens the Organize Favorites dialog box where you can do the following e Create a folders e Rename folders e Move favorites to a specific folder e Delete a favorite or favorite folder Help Menu The following table describes the DX8000 Help menu commands Table G DX8000 Help Menu Commands Command Description DX8000 Help Opens the DX8000 Help system About Provides model and version information for the DX8000 application C624M C 5 06 DX8000 TOOLBAR This section describes the DX8000 toolbar The following table describes the DX8000 toolbar buttons Table H DX8000 Toolbar Buttons
14. C624M C 5 06 OPERATING PLAYBACK DIGITAL ZOOM Video playback can be zoomed using a control keypad or the mouse when the DX8000 is in the Playback or Search mode In Playback mode the on screen PTZ feature is replaced with the mouse activated digital zoom Playback digital zoom is also available in Search mode For information on the Playback mode refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 61 For information on the Search mode refer to Working in Search Mode on page 70 The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to operate playback digital zoom and includes the following topics e Zoom Using the Digital Zoom Control on page 67 e Zoom Using the Mouse on page 68 e Panning a Zoomed Image on page 69 e Working in Playback Mode on page 61 e Working in Search Mode on page 70 ZOOM USING THE DIGITAL ZOOM CONTROL The digital zoom feature is accessible when the DX8000 is in the Playback or Search mode For information on the Playback mode refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 61 For information on the Search mode refer to Working in Search Mode on page 70 To zoom using the digital zoom control 1 To place the DX8000 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following e On the DX8000 toolbar c
15. To enable the deinterlacing filter 1 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or al 2 Click if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode 3 Click 6 The Export Video dialog box opens 4 From the Export Format area select the Enable deinterlacing filter check box Export Format G AMI C ASF C Nalive C BMP C JPEG C TIF VV Audio Record Y Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y Indis deinterlacing filter Figure 62 Enabling the Deinterfacing Filter from the Export Video Dialog Box MAPPING AND DISCONNECTING A NETWORK DRIVE You can export sections of prerecorded video to a network drive The DX8000 allows you to map to or disconnect from a network drive In this case you must use the IP address of the target drive The DX8000 allows you to use the host name of the target device To do so you must enable NetBIOS option in the Windows environment You need to know what letters are already assigned to drives and the path to the folder you want to map This section describes how to map to and disconnect a network drive and includes the following topics e Mapping a Network Drive on page 94 e Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 95 MAPPING A NETWORK DRIVE To map a network drive 1 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or al 2 Click if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mod
16. Disable Relay will not activate when the alarm is triggered Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact same time the alarm is triggered 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the alarm has been triggered C624M C 5 06 Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output To configure an ATM POS activated relay output 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the ATM POS tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an ATM POS a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Selecta relay timing value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alam ATM POS video Loss Motion Input Relay Output Activation Period ATM POS 01 Relay 03 I Follow Event ATM POS 02 Disable ATM POS 03 ATM POS 04 E ATM POS 05 No Link Y No Link ATM POS 06 No Link No Link ATM POS 07 No Link v No Link ATM POS 08 No Link vo Link To activate combo box you should link Relay with POS in the linking setup tee Figure 106 Linking Relays to ATM POS The following table describes the available options Table AK ATM POS Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activat
17. Enter an optional e mail address of a second person you would like to send a copy of the notification to in the CC text box Enter text for the subject line that will appear in the e mail notification in the Subject text box The default subject line is DX8000 a b G Emergency Email Notification Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification Enable Notification Full name Shipping Area DVR E mail Address fshipdockdvr peleo com B Add to Group r None y na com Add to Group BH Subject L None zi Shipping dock security event D gt 8000 mail SMTP smtp domainl pelco com IV My E mail Server Requires Authentication Server address smtp domaint pelco com User name shipdockdvr Password 15 Test E mail Notification r Mail Group ty Department E mail bwade pelco com asmith pelco com kjefferson pelco com Group Security Department Security Department Security Department Delete Edit Manage Groups r Frequency 1 Minute Stark 7 00 19 AM End 9 10 19 AM El Ek Notification Items Figure 144 Sending E Mails to Individuals Cancel CeO C624M C 5 06 Sending E Mail Notifications to Groups To configure e mail notification to send e mail alerts to a group of individuals 1 Onthe
18. e Setting Up COM1 and COM Port Properties on page 149 e Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode on page 150 e Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 151 e Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 154 e Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 159 Setting Up COM1 and COM2 Port Properties This topic describes how to set up COM1 and COM2 communication port properties Access the Network page to configure the communication ports For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 For information about the Port Device page refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 147 The following table describes the COM1 and COM2 port properties Table AP COM1 and COM2 Port Properties Property Selection Interface Mode RS 232 default Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 28800 38400 57600 or 115200 Parity None Odd or Even Data Bits 5 6 7 or 8 Stop Bits 10r2 To set up COM1 or COM2 communication properties 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select COM1 or COM2 RS 232 is the serial data communication standard 3 Inthe device drop down box select a device 4 Configure the following COM1 COM2 port settings using the drop down boxes provided e Interface mode RS 23
19. 1 Click Estimated Backup Size The Estimated Backup Size dialog box opens displaying backup details 2 Read the backup information and verify that the selected backup device provides adequate space to receive the backed up data 3 Click OK 4 Click OK to accept the defaults for the time setting channel record type and categories The backup starts immediately or b To customize the backup options 1 Change the backup time range channel record type and category 2 Click Estimated Backup Size The Estimated Backup Size dialog box opens displaying backup details 3 Click OK 4 Read the backup information and verify that the selected backup device provides adequate space to receive the backed up data 5 Click OK The backup starts immediately C624M C 5 06 Backup now r Device Selection r Time Setting E 7 a CD R Rw O TEAC CD W552 Ei DVD R RW E NOT INSTALLED E de TAPE DEVICES E dA DAT AIT DLT NOT INSTALLED Backup Time Range B HARD DISK DRIVES 2005 ZU E1 S Remote drive NOT INSTALLED Dae fos y m o s v s B de drive NOI END e r Channel Record Type T2 T5 T4 Ts Te T7 Te a ST 0 Map a network drive Disconnect mapped drive Categories an Recording y E Estimated Backup Size Cancel Figure 121 Instant Record Backup Now Dialog Box MAPPING A NETWORK DEVICE You can back up video to a network drive The DX8000 allows you
20. 4 select which of the camera s auxiliary outputs to operate Buttons 1 4 operate as a toggle on off each time they are clicked For example an Esprit equipped with a wiper uses Aux 1 to control the wiper In this case pressing Aux and then 1 sends a command to the Esprit to operate the wiper You must configure the camera to establish how the camera responds to an auxiliary command For detailed information about how a specific Spectra or Esprit camera system interprets auxiliary commands refer to the documentation that accompanies your Spectra or Esprit camera system To send an auxiliary command 1 Onthe DX8000 keypad click to enter the programming mode 2 Select the camera in the DX8000 view panel to which you want to send the auxiliary command 3 Click the Aux button Keypad buttons 1 4 are available Figure 29 Auxiliary Aux Button The following figure shows that keypad buttons 1 4 are available Figure 30 Keypad Buttons 1 4 are Available 4 Click a keypad button 1 4 The auxiliary function assigned by camera for the selected button is executed 54 C624M C 5 06 CONFIGURING PRESET TOURS A preset tour allows a camera to move through a programmed sequence of PTZ presets The DX8000 Series DVR can store up to four preset tours While four tours can be programmed only one tour can be activated at a time A preset tour will operate continuously until another PTZ control action is performed At least one P
21. Figure 31 Preset Tour Dialog Box C624M C 5 06 55 56 Adding Presets to a Tour To add presets to a tour 1 Access the Preset tour group dialog box For information on accessing the Preset tour group dialog box refer to Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 55 2 Click the check box next to one of the presets you want to add to the tour 3 Double click within the Dwell Time field of the preset and increase or decrease the time in seconds the camera will remain on the preset during that sequence of the tour 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each additional preset you want to add to the tour 5 Click Add to Group 6 Click Save 7 Click Exit to return to the main screen Preset tour group xj Available presets y Number Name Dwell Time Sec 1 Preset01 2 2 Preset02 7 E 5 6 O 4 Preset 4 2 Os Preset 5 2 MA Preset 2 z Q Ato Group Preset Tour Group v 01 y y Number Name DwellTime Sec D 1 Preset01 E O 2 Preset02 7 O 3 Preset03 5 Delete Save Apply Exit dele Sere tw Em Figure 32 Adding Presetto Tour C624M C 5 06 Deleting Presets from a Tour To delete presets from a tour 1 Access the Preset tour group dialog box For information on accessing the Preset tour group dialog box refer to Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 55 2 Click the check box next to one or more presets you want to delete from the preset tour group 3 C
22. Predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data To search for transactions that meet specific exceptions 1 Ze On the DX8000 toolbar click al On the Search control click e The POS search view is displayed To select a ATM POS device do one of the following e n the DX8000 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected e Dothe following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box Set the date and time range for the search In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Transaction with Exception Only The Exception Code check box is available b Click the check box to select Exception Code The Exception Code text box is available c lypethe exception code in the text box Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid and if transactions with exceptions were recorded during the time range the transactions are displayed in the POS Search Table In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Live Start 01 13
23. Programming a Preset ACTIVATING A PRESET Double digit presets can be set or activated by pressing the first digit and then the second digit sequentially For example preset 20 can be selected by clicking the number 2 and then the number 0 on the PTZ keypad To activate a preset 1 Onthe DX8000 keypad click a preset number 1 32 on the keypad 2 Click to activate preset The camera repositions to the new preset Figure 21 Activating a Preset C624M C 5 06 47 CLEARING A PRESET To clear a preset 1 Onthe DX8000 keypad click to enter programming mode 2 Click the number of the preset you want to clear from the PTZ keypad 3 Click Cir 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to clear multiple presets vi BEE A 5 Click ES to exit programming mode Figure 22 Clearing a Preset PTZ PATTERNS A pattern is a user defined viewable camera path with a definite beginning and end Patterns are made up of a sequence of standard pan tilt and lens commands Patterns are stored in the internal memory of the PTZ device such as a Spectra dome that is connected to the DX8000 Depending on the type and configuration of the PTZ device the DX8000 can address up to four unique PTZ patterns Once defined a pattern can be activated with a series of on screen commands A pattern will run continuously until it is deactivated Only PTZ enabled cameras that support pattern programming through D P or Coaxitron protocols can use this fe
24. SELECTING THE EXPORT FORMAT The DX8000 allows you to select the export format The following table shows the available export formats e Native format When exporting video in the native format the DX8000 embeds a digital watermark in the video stream for the purpose of authentication Watermarking ensures that an image has not been edited or damaged after it has been recorded The watermark is an encrypted digital signature embedded in the video stream during the compression stage protecting the video from the moment of creation The DX8000 Viewer software is capable of reading a DX8000 watermark and verifying the originality of the video e AVI or ASF format Video exported in AVI or ASF format can be viewed using standard viewer software such as Windows Media Player When exporting video in the native format to a CD or DVD device the DX8000 will automatically include the DX8000 Viewer application along with the video This viewer is designed to play a variety of still image video and audio media formats including the native DX8000 format The DX8000 Viewer application will automatically run each time a CD or DVD created by the DX8000 s export feature is inserted into a Windows based PC To ensure that the viewer software runs automatically after the disk has been inserted verify that the auto run feature of your PC s optical drive has not been disabled Table AB Export Formats Format Description AVI Saves vi
25. The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Year View tab The Year View page is displayed 4 Click the day you want to schedule Month View Year View July 2005 Figure 92 Calendar Date Selection 5 Using your mouse select the recording modes and times for each channel you want to schedule For information on selecting a recording mode refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 124 6 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional day you want to schedule 7 Click Apply Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day To copy the schedule attributes of one day and apply them to a different day 1 From the DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Right click the calendar day you want to copy 4 Select Copy from the quick menu January 2004 59 EBS ETSI P hs ES ESA 0090 900608600 0000660 COo ORTI 5 000 cium Revert to daily schedule Figure 93 Year View Calendar Quick Menu 5 Right click the day on the calendar you want to apply the copied schedule attributes 6 Select Paste from the quick menu 7 Click Apply To change a custom schedule day to a regular schedule day right click and select Revert to daily schedule from the quick menu C624M C 5 06 127 CREATING MONTHLY OR MULTIPLE DAY RECORDING SCHEDULES Unlike schedules set in the Yea
26. This video image resides in memory and has not yet been stored on the hard drive The color of the timeline will be green This is because the system cannot tell what the data characteristic is while the data resides in memory For example if this data is recorded from a camera configured to monitor motion and there is no motion activity the data will not be stored on the hard disk drive C624M C 5 06 65 PLAYING BACK VIDEO BY EVENT 66 Users with Standard User access and higher can search video by events such as motion detection or alarm activation A sensor event is identical to an alarm event To play back video recorded during an alarm or motion event 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX 2 From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Index View The Event Type drop down box is displayed All z Motion 12 13 16 Motion 12 12 45 Motion 12 12 20 Motion 12 11 45 Motion 12 10 41 Motion 12 10 27 Motion 12 10 12 Motion 12 10 01 Motion 12 09 38 Motion 12 09 20 Motion 12 08 49 Motion 12 08 06 Figure 40 Event Type Drop down Box 3 Select a camera by clicking it in the Site tree 4 Inthe Event Type drop down box select the day that you want playback to begin 5 Inthe Event Type drop down box select the event type you want to view Options are as follows e All e None e Motion e Alarm in e ATM POS e Video Loss 6 Select an event from the listing 7 On the playback control click J to begin viewing
27. e SAMSUNG V2 0 e PANASONIC e VICON e KALATEL You must configure one of the RS 422 RS 485 PTZ ports for Spectra for Coaxitron to function For more information refer to Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 150 In the PTZ Locking Auto timeout drop down box select an appropriate timeout value Time out values can be set between 5 and 60 seconds The default value is 10 seconds Because the DX8000 Series DVR is designed to operate in a networked environment it is possible that multiple users may attempt to simultaneously control the PTZ features of a single camera To minimize potential conflicts only one user at a time is allowed to control the PTZ features of a camera PTZ control is made available on a first come first served basis Once a user gains control of a camera s PTZ features all other users are locked out and must wait until the controls for that device have been left idle for the amount of time configured for that camera as specified in the PTZ Locking Auto timeout drop down box 105 106 g Set the selected camera address as follows 1 In the Dip Switch Address drop down box select an address from the available addresses If the selected camera s protocol is set to NO PTZ or PELCO C then the DIP Switch Address drop down box is unavailable In this case the camera s dip switch setting cannot be set using software This option is available for cameras and protocols that support software co
28. the viewed image might move or tear The View menu s Deinterlaced Image option is used to enhance the image for printing To print an image using the deinterlaced option il 2 C624M C 5 06 Click or al Locate the video image you want to print Refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 61 and Working in Search Mode on page 70 for information on locating video Click Vl to freeze the image for printing Click to print the image to a designated printer 101 Setting Up the DX8000 Only a single user with Administrator or Power User access is allowed to access a DX8000 s Setup mode box at one time When connected to a network supporting multiple DVRs and or clients users with Administrator access override and block Power Users If two users with the same access level attempt to enter Setup mode simultaneously the DX8000 will allow access to setup features on a first come first served basis Unavailable setup options will be grayed out This section describes the Setup Mode and includes the following topics e Accessing the Setup Mode on page 102 e Understanding the Setup Dialog Box on page 103 e Camera Setup on page 105 e Link Setup on page 111 e Schedule Setup on page 122 e Setting Up Network Properties on page 143 e Data Backup Setup on page 164 e User Setup on page 171 e Site Setup on page 177 e System Setup on page 182 e External Monitor Setup on page 191 e Emergency Notification Setup on page 198 e Eme
29. the zoom If zooming out the zoom If zooming in the zoom zoom in operations to ar an area about 0 25 inches 6 4 mm in size the zoom feature performs as follows actor is at x6 In this case the selected viewing area is zoomed to the largest size factor is at x6 In this case the selected viewing area is zoomed to the original size the entire pane the zoom feature performs as follows actor is at x1 In this case the selected viewing area is slightly enlarged You would have to perform many rive at the largest zoom size If zooming out the zoom factor is at x1 In this case the selected viewing area is slightly reduced You would have to perform many zoom out operations to arrive at the original size e Youcan also use the hand tool and the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in and out The zoom factor is displayed in the upper right corner of the pane The effective zoom in factor is displayed after the zoom operation is performed The effective zoom out factor is not displayed To zoom using the mouse 1 To place the DX8000 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following On the DX8000 toolbar click Live On the DX8000 toolbar click Search 2 Click gt to start video playback 3 Do the following a 68 To zoom in click and drag the mouse diagonally in a downward direction to your right C624M C 5 06 Figure 42 Zoom In Using Mouse b Tozoom out click and drag the mouse diagonal
30. 114 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 117 e Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events on page 120 e Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 149 e Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 150 This section describes how to use the POS search feature and includes the following topics e Understanding the POS Search View on page 77 e Searching and Displaying POS Data by Device Name on page 80 e Searching by POS Transaction Number on page 82 e Searching for All Transactions with Exceptions on page 83 e Searching for Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exceptions on page 84 e Searching for Transactions by Line Item on page 85 e Searching for Transactions by Action Code on page 86 C624M C 5 06 UNDERSTANDING THE POS SEARCH VIEW To enter the POS Search mode 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ife 2 Onthe Search control click e The POS search view is displayed The following figure shows the parts of the POS search view Live Start or 10 2006 9 00 zd 00 00 3 2 End for 10 2006 ff co 00 00 Transaction Information Device Name Transaction Number srwzPospi Data Information Transaction with Exception Only Line Item Action Code I Exception Code Data Overlay Enable Figure 48 POS Search View C624M C 5 06 71 78 The following table describes the parts of the POS search view Table Y Par
31. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 y 1 L 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 L L I L 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 i oci f mg Ready otalrecorded 43 0 15 41 38 1M Figure 50 Display a POS Transaction Search by Device Name 81 SEARCHING BY POS TRANSACTION NUMBER The DX8000 allows you to search for a POS event by transaction number In this case you must specify the channel date and a time window in which the transaction is recorded To search for an POS event by transaction number 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click ak 2 On the Search control click e The POS search view is displayed 3 To select a device name do one of the following e In the DX8000 Site tree click a camera that is linked to an ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected e Dothe following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Select the date and time that you want to search for the transaction number 5 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Transaction Number The Transaction Number text box is available 6 In the Transaction Number text box type the transaction number 7 Click Start Search If the channel date time and transacti
32. 141 Add User to E Mail Group Deleting Members from an E Mail Group To delete a user from a group 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Dothe following a In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Select the user you want to delete from the list C Click Delete 5 Click Apply C Disable Notification Enable Notification r Mail Group Full name pxe000 First Floor Lobby Security Department E mail Group E mail Address ex8000_first_fr peleo com bwade pelco com Security Department asmith pelco com Security Department To fasmith peloo com Add to Group L None Y CC Add to Group 4 E L im Department I Delete Edit Manage Groups Subject Joxeoo0 Emergency E mail Notification Figure 142 Remove User from E mail Group C624M C 5 06 C624M C 5 06 Modifying E Mail Group Member Attributes To modify a user s e mail address or group affiliation On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 1 2 Do the following a b C d e In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop do
33. 16 Baud Rate Baud rate drop down box that allows you to select the baud rate for each device Available baud rates are as follows 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 28800 38400 57600 or 115200 9 Parity Parity drop down box You select the parity for none odd or even o Data Bits Data bits drop down box Configure the number of data bits for 5 6 7 or 8 o Stop Bits Stop bits drop down box Select the number of stop bits for 1 or 2 The following table lists the ports and the associated serial data communication standard they support e ForCOM1 and COM2 RS 232 is the default serial data standard e ForPort 1 to 4 RS 422 and RS 485 are the available serial data standards Table AO DX8000 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards Serial Data Standard Supported Port RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 COM1 COM2 1 v v 2 v v 148 C624M C 5 06 Table AO DX8000 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards Continued Serial Data Standard Supported Port RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 3 v v 4 v v SETTING UP ATM POS DEVICE COMMUNICATION PORTS The DX8000 allows you to use both the COM1 and COM2 RS 232 port and Port 1 to Port 4 RS 422 RS 485 to connect ATM POS devices Typically Port 1 to Port 4 are used to connect the KBD300A and dome devices This section describes how to select and configure the ATM POS device communication port and includes the following topics
34. 3 Front Office DX8000 Building 3 Lobby i DX8000 Lab A i DX8000 Lab B DX8000 Parking Lot C Local Upgrade Figure 150 Selecting the Local DVR to Update The options are as follows e lick Yes to select another server to update e Click No to finish the update process and reboot selectsever STE Server Information ServerName 08000 Building 7 IPAdress 169 254 54 214 Current Status Off line m Select to Server List Dx8000 Building 7 DX8000 Building 3 Loading Dock Ivi DX000 Building 3 Front Office DX8000 Building 3 Lobby i DX8000 Lab A i DX8000 Lab B DX8000 Parking Lot C Figure 151 Selecting a Remote DVR to Update Click Next and wait for the upgrade utility to copy the necessary files to the selected DVR At the completion of the update process a dialog box will appear prompting you to update another server if desired The local or remote server will reboot 30 seconds after the upgrade process has been completed select erase LISTE The server upgrade in process You will be shutdown in 30 seconds Do you update another server y n Figure 152 Upgrade Confirmation Dialog Box C624M C 5 06 RECOVERING A PASSWORD Upon request Pelco can issue a password recovery code that is valid for 24 hours on the machine for which it was issued only The original buyer of the system typically the dealer must contact Pelco Technical Suppor
35. 30 seconds Post Alarm 60 seconds 0 Linked Alarm 2 Linked Relay None Audio Installed Enable r Camera Properties r Motion Detection m Selected Channel ameral T Disable Number of Blacks 4 20x20 i ames Name Sensitivity _K lt _ Qrs CART cone Hide Select All Clear All A m Audio Settings O Protocol ecc Audio Channel T Audio Disable Os PTZ Locking Auto timeout 10Sec dao Unies Delaction Dip Switch Address None z View Video Loss Loss of synchronization T Low level of video p Picture Adjustment a SEN Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time B urrent Val ES TEC Satme PAH endtine aea NO Contrast NEC qM 127 0 128 0 m Apply to All Cameras E Hue E A ES D Iv Protocol Iv Motion Detection 3 Saturation 4 I Camera Security IV Audio Settings 127 0 128 0 Picture Adjustment IV Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras D Cancel Apply Figure 70 Parts of the DX8000 Setup Dialog Box C624M C 5 06 103 104 The following table describes the parts of the Setup dialog box Table AC Parts of the DX8000 Setup Dialog Box Item Button Part Description 1 Camera Click the Camera icon to configure cameras Available options are PTZ functions motion detect
36. A SPECIFIC POINT IN TIME To start video playback from a particular point in time 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click 2 Select a camera by clicking it in the Site tree You can also select the camera from a view pane if the camera appears in the panel 3 Inthe Timeline section do the following a In the Date Selection drop down box select the day that you want playback to begin b Use the spinner buttons to select the time 4 Click gt to begin viewing EY June 2005 By Sun Mon Tue WedThu Fri Sat 123 4 5b ig ae i8 9 10r 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Figure 39 Date Selection Drop down Box UNDERSTANDING INSTANT PLAYBACK The DX8000 s ability to perform instant playback of video is limited by a one minute delay interval The DX8000 has a built in latency of approximately one minute between the time that video is captured and when it is written to the hard disk This delay exists to ensure that video is accurately stored and that the DVR s database is updated correctly The delay interval is not affected if the DX8000 is in the alarm or motion record mode In this case the pre alarm or pre motion time period does not become a factor in determining the delay interval To initiate an instant playback gt On the playback control click Instant Playback The timeline is zoomed to the last two to three minutes of data The user has the ability to view video that is just recorded
37. Audit Failure Video Loss Audit Failure Viewing a Log File To view a log file 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click qa The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Log Information section select a log file from the Choose drop down box 4 Doone ofthe following a To view DX8000 logs click View The Log View dialog box opens Log Information s Choose System On Off View DS Log View Save As Figure 129 Viewing a Log File The following figure shows the Log View dialog box C624M C 5 06 185 186 Type Date Time User Description Period Video Loss 06 032005 005903 htumbo Channel 1 Video Loss Video Loss 09032005 050717 httumbo Channel 3 Video Loss pas 08 03 2005 y Video Loss 08 03 2005 06 07 17 htrumbo Channel 4 Video Loss Video Loss 08032005 050717 htumbo Channel 2 Video Loss End Date 08 03 2005 y Video Loss 08 03 2005 072445 htumbo Channel 2 Video Loss Video Loss 08 032005 095342 Admin Channel 2 Video Loss Video Loss 08 032005 102432 Admin Channel 2 Video Loss C User ID C System State Video Loss z d Hn Figure 130 Log View Dialog Box or b To view OS log information do the following 1 Click OS Log View The Windows Log Viewer opens 2 Click a radial button to select a category C Success 08 01 2005 c Error 08 01 2005 01 02 14 Ww38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error
38. C 5 06 The following table describes the parts of the Backup schedule page Table AW Parts of the Backup Schedule Page Item Part Description Backup schedule table Describes the configured backup schedule details e Name Type of backup schedule Daily or Weekly Daily includes all days of the week Monday through Sunday Weekly indicates a specific day of the week that the backup schedule is to occur A selection check box allows you to select or deselect a backup schedule to run as scheduled A deselected backup schedule does not run as scheduled e Backup start time Time backup schedule starts e Backup time The time period entered for the backup schedule e Filter The channels selected to be backed up e Target device The selected backup media device Backup schedule buttons Allows you to do the following e Add Opens the Add Backup Schedule dialog box for configuring a backup schedule For more information about the Add Backup Schedule dialog box refer to Adding a Backup Schedule on page 166 e Edit Allows you to edit the details of the selected backup schedule e Delete Allows you to delete a selected backup schedule e Instant Backup Opens the Backup Now dialog box where you enter options to start a backup information control buttons schedule Waiting backup Displays backup schedules waiting to be executed information e Backup time The date and time a backup schedule is defin
39. Camera Pattern radio button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work ATM POS Link Settings ATM POS Address ATM POSO1 ATM POS Name ATM POSO1 Click Apply Linked PTZ Setting Linked Camera Channel tamena q n S ti N C Linked Camera Pattern No jt in use zl Figure 86 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events C624M C 5 06 Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events To link a video loss event to a camera so that the detected video loss event results in a repositioning of that camera C624M C 5 06 1 Le On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Video Loss Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera channel from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to a video loss event detected by the source camera To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do the one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ prese
40. Data Format Name text box 6 Perform the edits 7 Doone of the following e Toaccept the changes click OK Tonotaccept the changes click Cancel Deleting a Data Format To delete an existing data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed C624M C 5 06 153 Click the Data Format tab The Data Format List page is displayed In the Data Format List highlight the name of a data format Click Delete A DX8000 message box is displayed prompting to confirm deletion of the data format Do one of the following To delete the data format click Yes To not accept the deletion click No or Cancel Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device After you have created a data format you can assign it to a specific ATM POS device To assign an existing data format to a specific ATM POS device 1 2 154 8 b C n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the device drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Settings tab The Available ATM POS Device setup table is displayed n the Data Format column do the following In the Device ID column click the check box to select an ATM POS device Do
41. ER SN HE EE edd See EE NUES 49 ACTIVATING a Pal ess nicis reete ni a ceca ed Ade arate ES ebbe taped deeds 50 Gledning a Patter RERUM 50 A CM 51 PIZ GontroliPatiel 3 5 ite syne seh esr tae aded 52 ITI 53 AUI AUX BUULOM ON 54 Keypad Buttons 1 4 are Available 54 Preset lour Dialog iii A da A a Melo 55 Adding Breset to NOUR oc 0222 42 welt kits e Deh eel keh SoS td id dd 56 DeletingiPreset OM TOUR s 9 oe esas tse da a A eius wee eee seen Race ede es era REB wena dined 57 Activating a Preset Tau 58 dL nzsdiNEME L EEAMU TTMTMSTSS 61 ave dini mP 62 Playback Speed and Vol me Controls 32 neto CERES peer pre scien a aia 63 Playback Timeline une a diana RE Rie rS uhr id EYE TAM PuesER ER aw E tea oe dae 64 Date Selection Drop down BOX s 4 eo e mte hee Fave LR Rete e Rp dee DR Ha bu FR Pet Un oth desta 65 Event Type Drop d0Wn BOX zeli a it E exe o rt OA la 66 Playback Digital Zoom Control be Er e Ded CR auc Ge cae tke EETIPITPEUR D Gena Vr Re ga Rr Qr ERR 67 Zoom In Using MOUSE 69 Z gn Out UslngMOLSB 535 adeb RD eof dn eR DRESDEN RR RD RR Edd NE I ede dq de dE 69 Panning Zoomed Video with the Mouse o 69 DX8000 DVR Search Mode Window 0 0006 c cc III e em e sre 71 DX8000 DVR Index Search Screen 74 DX8000 DVR Thumbnail Search Screen nnana nnn e e le 75 POS S ar Gh VIGW Ecc
42. For more information refer to Setting Up Network Properties on page 143 e Adda printer if you want to print still video images For more information refer to Printing Images on page 101 If the above steps have not been done refer to the installation manual supplied with the unit for instructions on installing and configuring your DX8000 NOTE System administrators are recommended to read the Important Security Information for System Administrators manual and configure the DX8000 to ensure maximum DX8000 server operation security This section includes the following topics e Upgrade Policy on page 14 e Starting and Shutting Down the DX8000 on page 15 UPGRADE POLICY Pelco s representations regarding product features and performance are limited to those made in the specification sheet and installation operation manual in effect at the time the product was manufactured Pelco does not represent or warrant that any upgrades to product hardware or software will be made available in the future When possible Pelco will offer product upgrades to purchasers of its products The upgrade policy is described in the following sections e Software Upgrades on page 14 e Hardware Upgrades on page 14 SOFTWARE UPGRADES 1 All upgrades for Pelco software shall be free to the customer for the duration of the warranty period This offer does not apply to software that may be installed in a Pelco product that is licensed from another supplier All ot
43. Group To delete a group 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b In the Group Name table select a group c Click Delete Click Close Click Apply Adding Members to an E Mail Group Up to 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group To add e mail addresses to a group 1 2 C624M C 5 06 On the DX8000 toolbar click kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click amp The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Do the following a In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Ensure that the group check boxes under To and CC are unchecked c Enter an e mail address in the To or CC text boxes d Click Add to Group Click Apply 207 208 Disable Notification Enable Notification r Mail Group Full name pxeo00 First Floor Lobby Security Department iE E mail Group E mail Address 28000 first r pelco com bwade pelco com Security Department To bwade pelco com Add to Group L None x Add to Group g Delete Edit Manage Groups 8000 Emergency mail Notification Subject Figure
44. Loss Channel CAMERADI Camera Name Camera 1 Es Record Link Settings Enable Record on Source Video Loss E vent AS cg C10 ci C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 Figure 83 Event Recording Link Settings Video Loss Record Link Settings Section C624M C 5 06 117 118 LINKING PTZ PRESETS AND PATTERNS TO EXTERNAL EVENTS The DX8000 can be configured in such a way that motion alarms ATM POS transactions and video loss events detected by one camera will result in the repositioning of another Similarly alarm inputs can be set to trigger camera positioning presets Only a single preset or pattern can be linked to a camera This section describes how to link PTZ presets and patterns to motion and alarm events and includes the following topics Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Motion Events on page 118 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events on page 119 Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events on page 120 Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events on page 121 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Motion Events To link two cameras so that motion detected on one results in the repositioning of another f 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Motion Detection Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera
45. Mb e ete bee f baa Cela Melee 2k 131 Montli View Page a EN UII Ded MN PS TEE TG 132 Custom Camera Settings Panel s eicere tot eed n e e re enar te te e r r ftu nag sp ted pes 33 Examples Of C stom Camera Settings i une coi ie ror aun atau dda tia UP DER Parting Hk Meee mae ae 34 Frame Rate Configuration Dialog BOX via A la soleil ek Licey Gil nob et es 36 Advanced Frame hate Cornfiguratiof Screens ensi R et epu RR okie Redd cowed ake e DUeXU WERE QUERY sale HET 37 Example of Frame Rate Capacity 38 irikinigiBelayssto Motion Detecta to Eta aee ed 39 lanking Relays toJ Mars teo rris Im Leto Od cete eden Her APRS ES a de ed Je thes t 140 Linking Relays to ATM POS ana ct tr A ay A de NERVES AM Ru dpud 141 Linking BelayS to VIDEO LOSS tuo oc eter ee tee Perd tdem edd n S ehe ede qaid eie epe juz Meat sete aS 42 NetWork setup Page cs Lecta ts Ub dero Rationi tne ds nine da ceo Lines aaa eee LO 144 IP Configuratiani Information BOX 4 2 sot ett de mI Rte ue b idee MODE SN EDU WA US olipa deN ed 146 Port Device Page Sii A qe bL NET A A ER E ei QN I RATES 147 Data Format Page x5 cos m tet shee ge rth a SS oie E RE Ne E dE t ENS 151 Assigning a Data Format to An ATM POS Device 2 2 0 ss I e hh 54 Advanced Page c oo eco dus ctore d ede meo Eth eerte be ded atten eb Aree d d bat Hind die d ed ici 157 Exceptions Dialog Box Sio uar Vere d EN SIE Ee E E DRE MIR MUNERE ENTIS bee EN Qr DANT 157 Assigning an Exception to
46. Select Upgrade Package dialog box for selecting the source from which to access files to upgrade the DX8000 software This command is available only when you log in to the DX80000 as Administrator Password Recovery Opens the Password Recovery dialog box for entering the password provided by Pelco Product Support For more information refer to Recovering a Password on page 215 For information on recovering a password contact Pelco Product Support Unplug Eject Hardware Opens the Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box for selecting the device you want to unplug or eject Exit Opens the Shut down dialog box for selecting one of the following actions requires a certain level of user permission e Shutdown Shuts down the DX8000 machine You must have Power User or Administrator access to shut down the DX8000 machine For more information refer to Shutting Down the DX8000 on page 15 e Restart Restarts the DX8000 application You must have Administrator user access to restart the DX8000 application For more information refer to User Setup on page 171 e Exit to Windows mode You must have Administrator user access to exit the DX8000 application to the Windows operating system For more information refer to Exiting to the Windows Operating System on page 17 Edit Menu The following table describes the DX8000 Edit menu commands Table C Edit Menu Commands Command Description Export Setup O
47. The search window facilitates access to the search capabilities of the DX8000 Available search methods include index thumbnail and pixel Each search method allows users with Standard User access and higher to locate video data instantly using criteria such as time of day or changes in window pixels As in Playback mode digital zoom export and print features are available in Search mode For more information refer to Operating Playback Digital Zoom on page 67 Exporting Video on page 91 and Printing Images on page 101 The following figure shows the parts of the DX8000 window in the Search mode HIS Camera 15 J Camera 16 Oe Fee S 14 F lb 3 el 8 J H 9 m m9 Moton 1343 10 Motion 1342 08 Moton 13 41 07 Motion 124006 Figure 45 DX8000 DVR Search Mode Window 71 72 The following table describes the parts of the DX8000 window in the Search mode Table X Parts of the DX8000 Window in Search Mode Item Part Description Index Search Allows users to search motion and alarm events listed in the event index panel Thumbnail Search Allows users to visually search video that has been recorded over a 24 hour period Video is presented as a series of thumbnail images Fach thumbnail represents the first image recorded during a specified period of time Thumbnails can be expanded and collapsed to represent hourly 10 minute and 1 minute intervals POS Search Allows users to sear
48. Video Loss Activated Relay Settings liiiisisisssssssssssssssss s e 1 TCP IP Ports Used by the DX8000 esisi ete a PAR her a er c Rte dnas 1 Parts of the DX8000 Application Window iiiisssssssssssssssssse II e n 1 DX8000 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards 2 2 20 0 0 octet ences 1 COMI and COMZ Port Properties i enesuis exe een erem cece Rn e Rr ER ER eI acp eere RETE 1 Parts of the Data Format Page 1 Transaction Start and End Parameters iilis 1 ACUM Cod 21 2 says treo rias aaa 1 ATM POS Exception Modifiers iye acia ai ads eee hing anne aie a epic dea bad aede ane yeh 1 KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features oooococoooocococorororoo coreo rr KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features ooooooocococococooro recen rr 1 Parts of the Backup Sched le Page cocos a aa 1 Pato the US e A OE RS ede IS 1 User Group ACCESS lia o iaa Camera Security Level arancel ainda 1 DX8000 Activities Windows OS Log FileS ooooooooooococococoororo rro 1 C624M C 5 06 Operation and Programming You are reading DX8000 Series digital video recorder DVR documentation The information in this documentation describes how to configure and use the DX8000 system in your security application For a brief description of the DX8000 server and client applications refer to Welcome to the DX8000 Series DVR on page 13 WELCOME TO THE DX8000 SERIES DVR Welcome to the DX8000 Series digital vi
49. a Inthe Sequence Table click the check box next to the sequence instance you want to delete b Click Delete C Click Save The Save profile dialog box opens 4 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence list 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply 7 Click Apply at the bottom of the External Monitor page Manual Camera Mapping Mode Panel Division Selection Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Add Modify Delete Ch 3 f2 fo zwah E sec Override monitor output in response to this type of event Sequence No Motion alarm override dwell time O EH EB HEB EB Edd ES Sequence Table im 1 0 Min 30 Sec 2 0 Min 1 Sec 89 g3 D Min 7 Sec gt Load Save Delete Apply Alarm input 1 17 60 Seconi Figure 138 Delete a Mapping Sequence C624M C 5 06 Appending an Existing Sequence List To append an existing sequence list to the current list 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card is installed The External Output page is displayed 3 Click Load The Load profile dialog box opens 4 Select a profile 5 Click OK The Append to list dialog box opens 6 Click Yes to add the new sequences to the existing list 7 To add delete or modify sequence inst
50. ak 2 On the Search control click e The POS search view is displayed 3 Perform a POS search by device name For information about performing a search by ATM POS device name refer to Searching POS Data by Device Name on page 80 4 Inthe POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 5 Onthe playback control click Play The video recorded for the selected POS transaction is played back and is displayed in the Video window 6 Use the playback control to stop or pause playback reverse playback and so forth Playback _ _ 01 10 2006 09 03 21 562 F Data Overlay Enable RANSACTION NUMBER 16 DATE 1 10 2005 TIME 9 3 36 CHEESE 4 99 SUB TOTAL 4 99 AX 0 40 DTAL 5 38 Start for 10 2006 o9 4 foo 00 24 End for 10 2008 x os os 00 r Transaction Information IV Device Name arw Posot Transaction Number r Data Information T Transaction with Exception Only I Line Item I Action Code I z T Exception Code I ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 ATMIPOSO1 ATMIPOSO1 ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 Start Search Stop Search Chan Device Name Trans Datejme O 2006 1 2006 1 10 2006 1 10 2006 1 10 9 4 12 2006 1 10 9 4 36 2006 1 10 9 4 44 2006 1 10 9 4 53 2006 1 10 9 5 0 aly gt Sa al 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
51. alarm inputs to a single camera You can also link a single alarm input to multiple cameras The DX8000 allows you link alarms to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes To link an alarm input to a camera 1 2 3 4 On the DX8000 toolbar click E In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera to which you want to link alarms Click the plus sign next to the to see the list of alarm inputs Drag an alarm input onto a camera Linking a Relay Output to a Camera The DX8000 allows you link relays to a camera You can link multiple relays a single camera You can also link a single relay to multiple cameras The DX8000 allows you link relays to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes To link a relay output to a camera 1 2 3 4 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera to which you want to link relays Click the plus sign next to to see the list of relay outputs Drag a relay onto a camera Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs To link a relay output to an alarm input i Z C624M C 5 06 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX In the Site tree click the plus sign next to to expand the Alarm tree if needed Relays can also be linked to cameras and alarms on the Link settings page For more information refer to Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings on page 111 Click the
52. and five smaller images e 10 Division 2 8 Two larger and eight smaller images e 13Division 1 12 One larger and 12 smaller images Ex Cycle Views Turns window cycling on and off Automatically cycles through each view panel ensuring all cameras get m displayed Group permission to change the dwell time is assigned by the Administrator to the following groups Restricted User Group Standard User Group and Power User Group For information on cycle views setup refer to Automatically Cycling Through View Windows on page 29 Full Screen Selects a full window view The application window is expanded to occupy the entire monitor screen Click the right mouse button to exit full screen view O E External Monitor Opens the external monitor drop down menu For more information refer to External Monitor Setup on page 191 C624M C 5 06 25 DISPLAYING THE DX8000 WINDOW FROM A PAGE To display the DX8000 main window from a Setup dialog page On the DX8000 toolbar click Live DESCRIPTION OF OPERATING MODES The DX8000 Series DVR has four primary operating modes Live Playback Search and Setup Each operating mode is accessed by clicking its corresponding button on the toolbar The following table describes the DX8000 operating modes Table I Operating Modes Icon Mode Description Live Enters the display mode and opens the DX8000 main window where live and playback video is displayed A e Li
53. any special incidental or consequential damages including loss of use loss of profit and claims of third parties however caused whether by the negligence of Pelco or otherwise The above warranty provides the Dealer with specific legal rights The Dealer may also have additional rights which are subject to variation from state to state If a warranty repair is required the Dealer must contact Pelco at 800 p289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain a Repair Authorization number RA and provide the following information 1 Model and serial number 2 Date of shipment P O number Sales Order number or Pelco invoice number 3 Details of the defect or problem If there is a dispute regarding the warranty of a product which does not fall under the warranty conditions stated above please include a written explanation with the product when returned Method of return shipment shall be the same or equal to the method by which the item was received by Pelco RETURNS In order to expedite parts returned to the factory for repair or credit please call the factory at 800 289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain an authorization number CA number if returned for credit and RA number if returned for repair All merchandise returned for credit may be subject to a 20 restocking and refurbishing charge Goods returned for repair or credit should be clearly identified with the assigned CA or RA number and freight should be prepaid Ship to the
54. appropriate address below If you are located within the continental U S Alaska Hawaii or Puerto Rico send goods to Service Department Pelco 3500 Pelco Way Clovis CA 93612 5699 If you are located outside the continental U S Alaska Hawaii or Puerto Rico and are instructed to return goods to the USA you may do one of the following If the goods are to be sent by a COURIER SERVICE send the goods to Pelco 3500 Pelco Way Clovis CA 93612 5699 USA If the goods are to be sent by a FREIGHT FORWARDER send the goods to Pelco c o Expeditors 473 Eccles Avenue South San Francisco CA 94080 USA Phone 650 737 1700 Fax 650 737 0933 REVISION HISTORY Manual Date Comments C624M 3 04 Original version C624M A 12 04 Added information about instant recording Ctrl Alt Del multilanguage support backup and export features C624M B 3 05 Refers user to consult the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide for information on using Ctrl Alt Del and the DX8000 default password C624M C 5 06 Added new features KBD300A keyboard support third party dome support ATM POS scheduled recording 36 camera view online Help ATM POS interface support making up to 100 simultaneous client to server connections instant playback quick menu to turn relays on off live audio over the network and video loss event linked to an alarm Pelco the Pelco logo Camclosure Coaxitron Esprit Genex Legacy and Spectra
55. aras Rh D ganda AMM ba BEP OI ERR IM puede 93 Installinid a USB Flash Drivenes 20 22 s to d metet Ye Sd aden anges ER OR um deer E LU 93 Removing USB Flash DIVES a tse ott t tto del et oett GAARA teet MN ED ME da Wiens t ona alin cS 93 Enabling ihe Deinterlacing Fl 2er o E A uA e eU ITUR NS had Wong Saha ET WIN 94 Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive 94 Mapping a Network Drives ax cds enh a hee ee aee s re der etit dece eae etia cba pete E PER CU 94 Disconnecting a Network Drive 95 Performing the Export et abes edat tecto IDOL Abel e o Mere der ALE eS Per bd ate tee id bl 95 Starting an Export POCESS 5 ex esee e a A RP E E Ould tly ye ha waked Sha ea cards dante 95 Changing a Bookmarked Time Range 2 ses ples cete REY D gid idea E RE AR ERE EN Fa RIAM 97 Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name iiiisissssssssssssssssss s IIR re 97 Selectirig the Export Eorimalt ests it ds IE aman wan D RR e ERI bd Fou tesis 98 Exportinga Sequence of Sill Ma ES u s vuU RA AA IR IER EY epe ds 99 Fifializirig dn EXDOEE PlOCESS rad ote d acinis n d scent e a e d ete Re tK e 99 Stopping an Export While ini Process 5 sus antes A CONGR RA GU A eee ee gva ne Ud edes 100 Retaining Video When Stopping an Export Process 2 2 20 ccc ccc ttre c tenet e eens 100 Deleting Video Data When Stopping an Export Process 0 0 0 0 coe sse 100 Working with DX8000 Backed Up Video iissssssssssssssssssssss IRA I em n n 100 Rin
56. assigned to a view pane e Instant Recording A global setting that when selected enables instant recording capability for the cameras assigned to a view pane e POS A global setting that when selected enables POS video recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane e Select All Selects all of the OSD options e Background Color Opens a submenu with the following choices Set Color Opens the Colors palette for selecting or creating a background color Disable Background Disables a background color from being shown Log Opens a submenu with the following choices e System On Off e System Failure e Export e Backup e Network Connection e Login ID list with Time e Video Loss Resolution Opens a submenu with the following choices e 1024x768 e 1280x1024 Cycle Views Setup Opens a submenu with the following choices e Dwell time change Opens a submenu with the following choices for assigning permission to a user group allowing the selected user group to change the dwell time Restricted User Group Standard User Group Power User Group e Dwell time Opens a submenu of dwell times with the following choices 2Sec b5S ec 10Sec 30Sec 60 Sec Extended View Enlarges the video image displayed in the view pane Index View Opens the Event Index pane Display Deinterlaced Image Selects the deinterlace mode for enhancing the display of video images C624M C 5 06 23
57. box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected 4 Selectthe date and time for the POS search event as follows a Select the Start date b Select the End date c Select the End time d Select the Start time 5 Inthe Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 6 Verify that the ATM POS device name displayed in the Device Name text box is the correct device for the search 7 Click Start Search The POS Search Table is populated with POS transaction data Start o 10 2006 amp os foo 00 End for 70 2006 J o9 05 00 e Transaction Information V Device Name JaTM POSO1 5 Transaction Number r Data Information TF Transaction with Exception Only T Line Item T Action Code El F Exception Code Start Search I Stop Search a Device Name F Data Overlay Enable 2 ATMJPOSO1 16 2006 1 10 9 3 36 2 ATM POSO1 17 2006 1 10 9 3 50 2 ATM POSO1 18 2006 1 10 9 3 59 2 ATM POSO1 19 2006 1 10 9 4 12 2 ATM POSO1 21 2006 1 10 9 4 36 ATM POSO1 22 2006 1 10 9 4 2 ATM POSO1 23 2006 1 10 9 4 53 Fd ATM POSO1 24 2006 1 10 9 5 0 Figure 49 POS Transaction Search by Device Name 80 C624M C 5 06 Displaying POS Data Discovered by Device Name To display a POS transaction and its associated video C624M C 5 06 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click
58. case the DX8000 application will not start until the password is manually entered NOTE The DX8000 will not automatically reboot if there are mapped network drives To enable the Auto Reboot feature il 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click c The System page is displayed In the Auto Reboot section click the Enable check box In the Auto Reboot section do the following to specify the day and time to automatically reboot the system a Select the day of the week in the drop down box b In the Hour drop down box select the hour Time is displayed in 24 hour clock format c In the Minute drop down box select the minutes Click Apply WORKING WITH ONLINE HELP The DX8000 server includes an online Help system By default the Help system is disabled and not available for viewing The Admin user has authority to configure the DX8000 to display or not display online Help When Help is enabled all user groups can open view the Help system To enable disable Help for viewing 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click q The System page is displayed In the DX8000 Help section do one of the following e Click the Enable DX8000 Help to select Help for viewing e Click the Enable DX8000 Help to deselect Help for viewing Click Apply C624M C 5 06 EXTERNAL MONITOR SETUP The DX8000 supports an optional multip
59. configuring141 C624M C 5 06 advanced motion activated configuring139 advanced video loss activated configuring 42 alarm event external linking to114 ATM POS event external linking to114 motion event external linking to113 See also relays video loss event external linking to115 relay properties setting up112 See also relays schedule setup frame rate basic configuring135 frame rate configuring135 record mode122 124 system setup182 user access171 setup pages Backup page164 Camera page103 Ext Monitor page191 Linking page111 Network page default Network pagel 43 DNS WINS page146 Schedule page122 Site page177 System page182 User page1 1 shortcut keys PC keyboard45 Home and End Insert and Delete Left and Right Arrow Page Up and Page Down Plus and Minus Up and Down arrow using to operate PTZ and lens functions44 45 shortcut menus local site shortcut menu31 relay shortcut menu32 remote site shortcut menu32 site designator38 site name143 site tree all cameras assigning from32 how organized20 local expanding and collapsing31 overview31 remote expanding and collapsing32 single camera assigning from32 software DX8000 DVR server using14 obtaining from Web14 upgrading14 software upgrade port145 223 standard view mode43 static IP address adding remote site with static IP address177 assigning143 144 remote site177 status bar21 stop bits150 synchronization loss of1
60. each relay you want to link to the selected alarm You can also drag relays onto alarms in the Site tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply Alarm Channel ALARMO1 Alarm Name Alarmor F Link Settings R2 R3 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 Figure 77 Event Relay Link Settings Alarm Link Settings Section Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to an ATM POS event 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 n the ATM POS Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS Address drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected ATM POS address You can also drag relays onto ATM POS devices in the Site tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply ATM POS Address ATM POS 01 ATM POS Name JaTM Posor ATM POS Link Settings Linked Relay Setting m re Les a as ee J e Jm R3 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 Figure 78 Event Relay Link Settings ATM POS Link Settings Section 114 C624M C 5 06 Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to a video loss event 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup di
61. event detected during the interval and a still image in JPEG format of the last event To configure notification frequency On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is display Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 1 Ze In the Frequency section select the frequency interval from the drop down box Options are sending an e mail notification once every 1 minute 10 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours Setting the Time of Day To set the time of day during which e mail notifications will be sent 204 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is display Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Frequency section do the following a Click the Start check box to use the spinner buttons or type the earliest time of day you want e mail notifications to be sent for example 7 30 AM b Click the End check box to use the spinner buttons or type the latest time of day you want e mail notifications to be sent for example 6 00 PM Click Apply C624M C 5 06 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Motion Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever a camera attached to a DX8000 detects motion To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to motion events 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kill The S
62. for a smaller one the smaller drive will be returned to the customer along with the upgraded unit While Pelco will perform all upgrades with the utmost consideration and care Pelco cannot guarantee that any of the data and or video stored on the existing hard drives will not be lost or damaged Pelco also is not responsible for damage or loss of data C624M C 5 06 STARTING AND SHUTTING DOWN THE DX8000 This section describes how to start and shut down the DX8000 and includes the following topics e Starting the DX8000 on page 15 e Shutting Down the DX8000 on page 15 For information on logging in to the DX8000 refer to Lagging In to the DX8000 Application on page 16 STARTING THE DX8000 To start the DX8000 1 Once the system is installed open the front panel of the DVR and press the power switch oo 000050 oo Figure 1 Front Panel and Power Switch 2 Wait while the unit starts this may take several minutes SHUTTING DOWN THE DX8000 You must have Power User or Administrator access to shut down For information on users security levels refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 173 You must also have a Windows password to shut down For information on the Windows default password refer to the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide To shut down 1 From the DX8000 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut Do
63. for all view panels except the channel being searched The DX8000 allows you to view playback on multiple cameras in addition to the camera being searched This feature is valuable if you want to examine a variety of views recorded at the time a certain event was detected 10 Click gt to begin viewing C624M C 5 06 73 Fie Edt View Export Favorite Help Ps GCSE me EEEIEETEEDES bo 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 06 09 10 11 12 EEE 1172819 20 21 22 23 Motion 15 36 03 Motors 153524 Motion 15 24 40 x rajo ps antes ho Tetal seceded 80 1D 21 A 5004 Figure 46 DX8000 DVR Index Search Screen THUMBNAIL VIDEO SEARCH 74 Thumbnail search allows users to visually search video that has been recorded over a 24 hour period Video is presented as a series of thumbnail images Each thumbnail represents the first image recorded during a specified period of time Thumbnails can be expanded and collapsed to represent hourly 10 minute and 1 minute intervals To search video visually using thumbnail images 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click Ifa 2 Onthe DX8000 Search control click BB 3 Select a camera from the Site tree 4 From the drop down box select the date on which you want to begin your search 5 Click the thumbnail for the hour you want to begin searching 6 Click to change the thumbnail time range to shorter intervals or click to change the thumbnail time range to longer intervals e Clic
64. frame rate capacity to distribute among the recorder s channels This margin of frame rate capacity or headroom is presented to the user as color filled sections of the frame rate sliders White areas on the slider represent frame rate capacity that is not available to that channel In certain cases adjusting the available frame rates of one channel or resolution type may free up capacity for other channels The following figure illustrates available and unavailable frame rate capacity CH2 Fem 640x240 z 7IPS Figure 103 Example of Frame Rate Capacity The following table describes available and unavailable frame rate capacity Table AH Frame Rate Capacity Item Description 1 Available frame rate capacity O Unavailable frame rate capacity SETTING UP ADVANCED RELAY OUTPUT Relays work much like switches When triggered relays can activate external devices such as sirens light fixtures and door locks The DX8000 Series DVR allows Administrators and Power users to link relays to cameras and alarms Up to 20 seconds of delay can be set from the moment an event is triggered to the time when a relay is activated Make sure you have linked relays to the appropriate cameras and alarm inputs before attempting to configure them For instructions on linking alarms and relays refer to Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 33 and Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs on page 33 This section describes how to se
65. in the main user list Click Set Password The Set Password dialog box opens Enter a new password in the New password field Retype the password again in the Confirm new password field Click Apply in the Set Password dialog box Click Apply in the User Setup screen CHANGING A USER S GROUP AFFILIATION An Administrator level user can also change the group affiliation of users by dragging user names among different groups To change a user s group affiliation gt In the User name column of the User page click the user s name and drag it in a group DELETING EXISTING USERS Administrators can delete existing users To delete a user s account li Ze On the DX8000 toolbar click Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click O The User page is displayed Click the user name of the user you want to delete from the main user list Click Remove The Remove User dialog box opens Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel and return to the User Setup screen Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen SETTING LOGIN TIMEOUT Administrators can define the amount of time a user s account can remain idle before having to log in again This setting applies to all users regardless of access level To set login timeout 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click O The User page is displayed Select a time limit from the Use
66. iris function on the keypad Figure 17 PTZ Keypad with Camera Lens Controls C624M C 5 06 43 44 ADJUSTING THE CAMERA Z00M To adjust camera zoom using the mouse Rotate the mouse wheel forward to zoom in and backward to zoom out The following figure shows how to operate the mouse to zoom in and out You can also use keyboard shortcuts to operate the lens features of cameras such as Pelco s Spectra IIl For more information about using keyboard shortcuts refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 45 ga AS Figure 18 Mouse Wheel Zoom C624M C 5 06 USING PC KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS TO OPERATE PTZ AND LENS FUNCTIONS Users with Standard User access and higher may use a PC keyboard to operate PTZ and lens functions of cameras that support such features PTZ and lens functions can be controlled in Live mode using the keyboard The following table describes the keyboard buttons that you use to control PTZ and lens functions Table P Standard PC Keyboard Functions for Controlling PTZ and Lens Functions Key Description Insert and Delete These keys provide the following functionality e On screen display preset and pattern modes Insert increases and Delete decreases focus performing the same actions as the focus control on the PTZ keypad e Remote camera programming mode Insert and Delete perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad focus 4 and buttons navi
67. ld 213 Selecting the Local DVR to Update 0 e ea 214 Selectinigia Remote DVR to Update atic odes on np eae dee LE da ete du aee es e eame 214 Ubgrade Contirmati n Dialog BOX sisesta fess mente bee roit ee ea ad tedio bete deed idonei amd aida 214 Password Recovery Dialog BOX 2 ete cte tet de tx EE EE 215 11 List of Tables EN lt xXE lt CINDODOZZETACLIO AMOO w I gt gt SRUESSEBEADI BRO EP REPEDAARAESS Parts of the DX8000 Application Wind0W ooooooooooooo oo File Meu Command sca sso otn oce herr et labra Edit Menu Commands 1 a E ee RE a oeeue ciate Ree ed nita ren SR pd RED View Menu Commands 2 22 rr RE ERN rada Export Menu Commands sene creber can eger een cau ll ee ees d Erste ise dees og Favorite Menu Commands 2 2 2 0 0 0 ss e hh ra DX8000 Help Menu Commands ooo DX8000 Toolbar Buttons sissssssssssssssssssss IRR e eme m e n azar View Panes Panel liisissssssssssssssssssssssssssss sehen e en a n nns How View Panels are Organized exer RRERRLIAREvRSG RN REC MENO DEBER kia Re RIED SI View Panes and Panel exce EE Red REA FEREARRERXNEERPCLOI PER Y REN Ad RE Ne RR OUO RE ERN Site tree Parts a toos Is ett es E b cd RUNE eae E Ee RANDE TREND Sn ER Parts of the Live View OSD Pare rete to Rp E pert eek eR cU P Ro Dea eren QVE BE Rr PT gd instant Recording Indicators esmas one tn aye liado DIES Standard PC Keyboard Functions for Controlling PTZ and Lens Functions
68. link an alarm input to a camera so that activation of the alarm results in a repositioning of that camera C624M C 5 06 1 Le On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Alarm Record Link Settings section do the following a b Select an alarm from the Alarm Channel drop down box In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to an alarm input detected by the source alarm To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do the one of the following To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to an alarm input detected by the source camera Click the Linked Camera Preset radio button to select this option In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 for the camera to move to To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to alarm input detected by the source camera Click the Linked Camera Pattern radio button to select this option In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Click Apply Linked PTZ Setting Alarm Recor
69. mapped drive is displayed in the Device Selection area under Remote drives Click Disconnect a mapped drive to disconnect a mapped drive 7 In the Device Selection section click the check box for the device you want the data to be backed up to 8 Click OK The Backup schedule table is displayed and the newly scheduled backup time range is listed in the table and the selection check box is marked EDITING AN EXISTING BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8000 allows you to edit or delete an existing backup schedule To edit a backup schedule 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click il The DX8000 setup screen is displayed 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen is displayed 3 Inthe Backup schedule table do the following a Click the backup schedule time range you want to edit b Click Edit The Edit Backup Schedule dialog box opens displaying the current settings for the selected backup schedule r Backup schedule Name Backup start time Backup time Filter Target device MDaily Backup 1342 1342 1243 All 1 REMOVALDRV Qu Backup 13 44 13 45 All 1 REMOVALDRY Instant Backup Delete Edit Add Figure 120 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule c Edit the backup parameters d Click OK The Edit Backup Schedule dialog box closes and the backup configuration screen is displayed The updated schedule details are displayed in the Backup schedule table 4 Click Apply C624M C
70. modes123 relay linking to camera33 remote setup using preset 9546 remote accessing programming features51 scheduled recording mode setting up124 security levels105 high low medium none settings custom settings examples of 134 customizing123 133 support for recording modes134 supported for recording modes133 settings customizing133 setup applying settings to all cameras111 audio108 communications protocol105 enabling disabling camera105 motion detection zones107 name customizing105 pan tilt and zoom105 picture105 picture properties106 PTZ locking auto timeout105 PTZ protocol105 security level105 security level selecting105 video loss detection110 single assigning to view pane32 zoom adjusting44 camera designator38 camera event detection and repositioning 218 overview118 camera mapping191 camera removing a linked alarm input34 channel resolution123 Coaxitron protocol46 COM1 or COM2 communications properties149 commands auxiliary sending54 compression video134 connecting DX8000 DVRs102 D protocol46 data bits150 data communications dome devices setting up150 data packets145 data transmissions145 designators camera38 site38 digital zoom control21 disk space21 disk status indicator21 display mode Live video26 playback video26 See pane panel DNS or WINS services setting up146 documentation printed15 Dome communications ports setting up150 down loading from Web14 dwell time23 DX8000 c
71. name of currently logged in user and total amount of recorded video The status bar is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the status bar For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 NOTE As the storage array of the DX8000 fills beyond its capacity video is deleted in a first in first out FIFO fashion The disk status indicator on the status bar shows the amount of disk space used by recorded video The red indicator marks the current recording position of the disk array blue indicators mark parts of the array that are storing previously recorded video and clear indicates that no video has been recorded in that area of the array C624M C 5 06 21 22 DX8000 MENU BAR This section describes the DX8000 menu bar commands and includes the following topics e File Menu on page 22 e Edit Menu on page 22 e View Menu on page 23 e Export Menu on page 24 e favorite Menu on page 24 e Help Menu on page 24 File Menu The following table describes the DX8000 File menu commands Table B File Menu Commands Command Description User Log in Opens the User Log In dialog box for entering the user name and password to log in to the DX8000 User Log out Immediately logs the current user out of the DX8000 The system returns to the default mode Software Upgrade Opens the
72. other than Guest If you have not been assigned a user account contact your system administrator before proceeding For information on the rights and permissions of the user groups refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 173 NOTE The Guest user account does not have access to the setup features of the DX8000 Only users with Administrator and Power User accounts are allowed access to setup functions This section includes the following topics e local DX8000 Login on page 16 e Remote DX8000 Login on page 17 LOCAL DX8000 LOGIN If you are logging into the DX8000 for the first time the login procedure is different from the method described below For information on first time login instructions refer to the DX8000 Installation manual This section includes the following topics e logging in to a Local DX8000 on page 16 e Logging Out of the Local DX8000 on page 16 e Exiting to the Windows Operating System on page 17 LOGGING IN TO A LOCAL DX8000 You must have a valid user name and password to log in to the DX8000 The user name and password are case sensitive To log in with a user name other than Guest 1 From the DX8000 main menu go to File gt User Log in The User Log in dialog box opens 2 Enter a valid user name in the User Name field and a valid password in the Password field 3 Click OK LOGGING OUT OF THE LOCAL DX8000 Logging out of the local or a remote DVR does not disconnect you from that system L
73. pane Double click the expanded view pane The view pane returns to its default size Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels To manually cycle through hidden view panels On the DX8000 toolbar click one of the panel division buttons repeatedly The view sequences through the view panels For example for a 4 Division display format if you click E repeatedly the DX8000 cycles through each of the eight available view panels Automatically Cycling Through View Windows The DX8000 provides an automatic cycle feature that when selected automatically cycles through each view panel ensuring all cameras get displayed Group permission to change the dwell time is assigned by the Administrator to the following groups Restricted User Group Standard User Group and Power User Group This section describes how to configure the DX8000 to automatically cycle through camera views and includes the following sections C624M C 5 06 Starting an Automatic Cycle View Mode on page 30 Stopping an Automatic Cycle View Sequence on page 30 Selecting User Groups to Set the Cycle View Dwell Time on page 30 Selecting the Cycle View Dwell Time on page 30 29 30 Starting an Automatic Cycle View Mode To start the automatic cycle view mode On the DX8000 toolbar click Cycle Views The Cycle Views icon turns blue indicating that the DX8000 is in the automatic cycle view mode The system will cycle through each panel displayin
74. plus sign next to F to expand the Relay tree if needed Drag a relay output onto an alarm input 33 34 REMOVING LINKS This section describes how to remove links and includes the following sections Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera on page 34 Removing a Linked Relay Output from a Camera on page 34 Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input on page 34 Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera To unlink an alarm from a camera 1 2 3 4 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera from which you want to remove an alarm input Drag the alarm outside the Site tree panel and then release the mouse button Repeat the above process for each alarm you want to remove Removing a Linked Relay Output from a Camera To unlink a relay from a camera f 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera from which you want to remove the relay output Drag the relay outside the Site tree panel to the DX8000 toolbar or panel above or below the Site tree panel and then release the mouse button Repeat the above process for each relay you want to remove Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input To unlink a relay from an alarm 1 E 600 R9 On the DX8000 toolbar click EY In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the alarm input from which you want to remove the rela
75. profile131 individual days scheduling127 multi day schedule creating128 record mode122 setting up124 single day creating129 C624M C 5 06 types of123 yearly recording schedule creating126 screen resolution23 search mode26 server sites connecting to DX8000 server sites177 server e mail201 Setup dialog box102 setup mode accessing102 alarm properties setting up112 See also alarm inputs camera setup105 133 See also camera commands listing of 104 Backup Camera Ext Monitor Linking Network Notification Schedule Site System User data backup164 Ext monitor setup191 how to open Setup dialog box26 multiple cameras alarm events linking cameras to record116 ATM POS events linking cameras to record117 motion events linking cameras to record116 video loss events linking cameras to record117 network properties accessing DX8000 network configuration details146 base port setting up145 DHCP setting up143 144 DNS or WINS services setting up146 overview143 port and device communications properties147 site name assigning143 static IP address entering143 TCP IP and bandwidth throttle setting up145 network setup static IP address entering144 overview102 PTZ presets and patterns alarm events linking to119 ATM POS events linking to120 linking to external events118 motion events linking to118 video loss events linking to121 relay output advanced alarm activated configuring1 40 advanced ATM POS activated
76. radio button if it is not selected to select the Manual Camera Mapping mode Select one of the sequence instances from the list by clicking on its name Select a screen division Drag cameras from the Site tree onto each view panel until all panels have been assigned a camera From the Min and Sec drop down boxes select the amount of time the sequence instance will remain on the monitor Click Modify Click Save The Save dialog box open 4 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence list 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply 7 Click Apply in the External Monitor page OSes DO 44400 N 3c Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Sequence Table D 0 Min 30 Sec L2 0 Min 30 Sec Add ms Min 9 Sec I Sequence No s Min 9 Sec Load Save Delete Apply Override monitor output in response to this type of ex mt Alarm input 1 zl 1 60Secon Motion alarm override dwell time Figure 137 Modify a Mapping Sequence 195 196 Deleting a Sequence Instance from the List To delete a sequence instance from the list 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card is installed The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following
77. s information in the emergency notification list LP Ze On the DX8000 toolbar click kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Notification page is displayed Do the following a Inthe Emergency Agent Setup section select a client from the list b Click Edit The Agent Setup dialog box opens C Entera new name for the client Client names can be up to 63 characters long and can include spaces but not special characters d Entera new IP address for the client e If necessary enter a port number in the Agent Port text box The default port number is 9004 Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change the Emergency Agent port number from its default of 9004 Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8000 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical Click OK Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen DELETING CLIENTS FROM THE NOTIFICATION LIST To delete a client from the emergency notification list 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click Ell The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Notification page is displayed Do the following a In the Emergency Agent Setup section select a client from the list b Click Delete The selected client is deleted Click Apply LINKING CAMERAS TO CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENTS After clients have been added cameras must be configured to notify indiv
78. searches the network for remote DVR sites Select the DVR site s you want to add to the site list Click Add Click Apply r Site information r Site IP list 1 r Manual C Site Name Add gt gt IP Address D 15 DX8000 Base Port Upgrade Port Information Port r Search D X8000 Server on NAT Q e 12 17 0 158 255 E Find Nam IP MAC Address B lal 172 17 0 158 00 0C 6E 3F EC A Add Group Edit Delete M Camera 4 V Camera 7 M Camera 11 M Gamer Refresh Cancel Apply Figure 125 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address 179 180 FINDING ACTIVE REMOTE CAMERAS After connecting to a remote site you should query the server to see which cameras are active Some DVRs have eight channels while others have 16 To refresh the screen and see which cameras are active 1 ef lab 172 17 0 158 On the DX8000 toolbar click Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click D Select the Manual radio button if it is not already selected Enter a remote site IP address Click Refresh Click Apply Sever on NAT Name IP MACAddes B Iv Iv iv v M Tv Camera 10 Iv Carers 11 M Camera 12 M Camera 18 IV Camera 14 4 Y Cancel ote Figure 126 Finalizing Site Setup C624M C 5 06 ACTIVATING REMOTE SITES The
79. the Advanced tab For information on the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 n the Exception Table select an exception Click Delete The DX8000 message box is displayed n response to the DX8000 message do one of the following Click Yes to delete the exception Click No if you do not want to continue with the deletion of the exception Click Cancel to discard the delete action Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device To assign an exception to an ATM POS device 1 2 n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab n the ATM POS Name drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Exception Table click the ID box of the exception you want to assign to the ATM POS device selected in the ATM POS Name drop down box Do one of the following e Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Exceptions dialog box e Click Cancel to exit the Exception dialog box and not save changes ATM PDS Name tarmePoso1 JATM POSO1 z r Exception Table Any field containing values must all g RU aene Tons Name Effect Add be found or satisfied before a data Dn Tronco Daa DEFINE Don t Show device exception is generated m di Each data device can trigger the Delete EN DX8000 to record at a special rate and for a sp
80. the DX8000 Client Application Manual This section describes how to use special view and search methods and includes the following topics e Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode on page 90 e Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously on page 90 VIEWING VIDEO IN THE DEINTERLACED MODE Images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second might move or tear In this case you can use the View menus Deinterlaced Image option to enhance the displayed image In the deinterlaced mode the DX8000 converts the recorded image and displays it at 2CIF resolution The process removes one of the ACIF interlaced fields even or odd from the 4CIF recorded image to arrive at 2CIF resolution for the displayed image The original image is retained at the recorded 4CIF resolution For exported images the DX8000 provides a global option for enabling a deinterlacing filter In this case the selected channel s image is exported at 2CIF resolution This setting is effective for all channels and cannot be set for individual channels For more information about enabling the denaturalizing filter refer to Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter on page 94 To view video using the deinterlaced option 1 Click gt to start video playback 2 On the menu bar click View gt Display deinterlaced image VIEWING LIVE AND PLAYBACK VIDEO SIMULTANEOUSLY The DX8000 allows simultaneous viewing of live and playback video from a single camera source To view live a
81. the optional DX8000 AUD audio card if necessary For information about installing the optional DX8000 AUD audio card refer to the DX8000 Installation manual Connect an audio input device microphone to the numbered DX8000 AUD audio card input for the camera channel being configured for live audio recording To hear live audio at the local server connect head phones to the DX8000 audio output connector the DX8000 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 3 Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available 4 In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel you want to configure for live audio recording 5 Inthe Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not selected 6 Click Apply 7 Verify that you can hear sound from the DX8000 audio output C624M C 5 06 LISTENING TO LIVE AUDIO The DX8000 audio feature allows you to listen to live audio at a local server or listen to live audio from a remote DX8000 server or client system For information about setting up the DX8000 server to record and listen to live audio refer to Audio Setup on page 108 This section describes how to listen to live audio and includes the following topics Listening to Live Audio at a Local Server on page 109 Listening to Live Audio from a Remote DX8000 System on page 109 Listening to Live Audio at a Local Server To listen to live a
82. the value found on the line is greater than the value entered in the Value text box lt Less than Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is less than the value entered in the Value text box Equal to Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is equal to the value entered in the Value field l Not equal to Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is not equal to the value entered in the Value field Editing an ATM POS Exception To edit an ATM POS exception 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration dialog box is displayed 3 Click the Advanced tab For information on the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 B 5 he Exception Table select an exception 5 C ick Edit The Exceptions dialog box opens 6 Edit the exception content 7 Do one of the following e Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Exceptions dialog box e Click Cancel to exit the Exception dialog box and not save changes C624M C 5 06 Deleting an ATM POS Exception To delete an ATM POS exception 1 Ze n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration dialog box is displayed Click
83. transaction data is recorded before the action code is defined the action code will not find the data structure within the transaction data The following table describes the ATM POS action codes Table AS Action Codes Code Description Code Description AL ALL CODES item or merchandise sold normally GR GAS REFUND refund of unused portion of gasoline prepayment AM AMOUNT TENDERED cash amount tendered IM INFORMATION MESSAGES displays message fields as is CC CREDIT CARD amount tendered with credit card IT ITEM SALE TRANSACTION displays message fields CD CASH DROP safe drop LO LOTTERY PAYMENT lottery pay out CG CHARGE ACCT amount added to charge account balance LS LOTTERY lottery sale CH CHANGE change due to customer MT Not included CK CHECK amount tendered with check NS NO SALE no sale CL CLERK NAME and or number or CLERK LOGIN NT NEG TAX negative tax CM MFR COUPON manufacturer coupon redemption OT Description not available CP COUPON store coupon redemption OV OVERRIDE override programmed price displays message fields CR CRITICAL CODES determined by Action Critical PL PRICE LOOKUP displays message fields CX CANCEL cancel entire sale before completion PO PAID OUT pay out cash from register C624M C 5 06 155 156 Table AS Action Codes Continued Code Description Code De
84. with access rights to control video playback Includes forward and reverse playback Panel and still image It also provides controls for playback speed and volume This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback timeline control panel For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 O PTZ OSD Menu or This control provides two functions depending on which mode the DX8000 is operating live view or playback Digital Zoom e Live View Mode In the Live View mode provides users with access rights to operate PTZ OSD Control features For information on using the PTZ OSD menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 51 This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback zoom control For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 e Playback Mode In the Playback mode provides users with access rights to operate digital zoom features This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback zoom control For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 Status Bar Displays current date and time recorder processing status disk status indicator user
85. without null frames C624M C 5 06 99 100 Figure 69 Real Time Versus Non Real Time Export To finalize the export process 1 Make sure that the export media selected is inserted in the drive unit and that the drive is ready 2 Inthe Time Range table click selection box for each backed up video time range you want to export 3 In the Export Format section do the following a Click the Audio Record check box to include recorded audio b Click the Real Time check box to export video using standard clock time 4 Click Export to export video data STOPPING AN EXPORT WHILE IN PROCESS Once an export operation has begun a user can easily stop it by interrupting or canceling the operation from the Export menu on the main or search screens Interrupting an export simply stops the progress of the export while keeping all video information stored up to that point intact Canceling an export will delete any video data exported during the operation as well as ending the export itself This section describes how to stop an export process and includes the following topics e Retaining Video When Stopping an Export Process on page 100 e Deleting Video Data When Stopping an Export Process on page 100 Retaining Video When Stopping an Export Process To halt an export that is in process while retaining video data stored to that point gt From the DX8000 menu bar choose Export gt Interrupt Export Deleting Video Data When Sto
86. zone 1 5 from the drop down box b Click the Hide Show button to either hide or display the motion grid c Move the Number of Blocks slider to change the grid size of the motion overlay 3 Define the area for motion detection as follows a Click Clear All to remove the currently defined motion detection area b Click Select All to enable motion detection for the entire viewable area c Hold down the eft mouse button and drag to select areas d Hold down the right mouse button and drag to deselect areas 4 nthe Motion Detection section move the Sensitivity slider to adjust motion sensitivity Moving the slider to the left decreases motion sensitivity moving the slider to the right increases sensitivity 5 Click Apply Motion Zone Zonet s r Channel Informe on Recording Mod Motion Rif ording Pre Alarm 30 st onds Post Alarm 60 conds Linked Alarm 2 Linked Relay Nf ne Audio Installed f nable C624M C 5 06 Figure 72 Camera Motion Detection Setup Schedule a 0 a r Camera Properties m Motion Detection Selected Channel Camere amera02 gt Disable Number of Blocks 4 20x20 aaa NT E Sensitivity lt irs wt Hide Seectl e Clear All Camera Security None A r Audio Settings Protocol coc El Audio Channel T Audio Disable PTZ Locking Au
87. 0 2006 e fos 03 03 End for 10 2006 10 o0 00 Transaction Information Device Name JATM POSOT je Transaction Number r Data Information IV Transaction with Exception Only H Line Item Action Code z Exception Code 01 10 2006 09 10 41 718 m Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 4 DATE 1 10 2008 TIME 9 11 5 ATM POSOL ATM POSO1 HOT DOGS ERK S109 ATM POSO1 SUBTOTAL 987 d TAX 0 73 TOTAL 10 66 ATMIPOSO ATM POSO1 ATMIPOSO1 ATMIPOSO1 ATM POSO1 Figure 52 Searching for Transaction with Exception Only Events C624M C 5 06 83 84 SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS THAT SATISFY SPECIFIC EXCEPTIONS The DX8000 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions that meet conditions as defined by one or more exceptions You can use specific exception codes to define the search criteria To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created first before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data The search criteria is based on the following Channel Camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data Date time Date and time window within which the transactions were recorded Exception code
88. 0 20 50 Backup Camera Name Camera 2 CRM Hide Selecta Clear All Camera Security None pm Audio Settings e Protocol PELCO C y Audio Channel Audio Disable e PTZ Lockina Auto timeout 10 Sec zj m Video Loss Detection Dip Switch Address Noe z View Video Loss I Loss of synchronization T Low level of video DPPPPPPPPP Picture Adjustment Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time 7 Current Value Brightness StatTime A Endtime oa 853 Contrast r Apply to All Cameras Hue ES IV Protocol JZ Motion Detection Saturation 4 M Camera Security Iv Audio Settings IV Picture Adjustment IV Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras Cancel Apply Notfication Figure 71 Camera Page C624M C 5 06 MOTION DETECTION SETUP Up to five motion detection profiles can be defined for each camera When the DX8000 is scheduled to record motion detection motion sensed in the selected zone will result in video data being recorded for that channel Motion detection can also be used to trigger relays PTZ presets and recording on multiple cameras Refer to Schedule Setup on page 122 and Link Setup on page 111 for more information To define motion detection profiles for the selected camera 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 To set up the motion grid do the following a Select the motion
89. 0 site 1 2 CAM expands DX8000 site 2 F2 F3 ON OFF Cameras are assigned numerically 1 16 to the respectively number video These controls display DX8000 video in the following divisions e F2 OFF Single division view e F3 MOM 4 division view e AUX ON 9 division view e AUX OFF 16 division view INSTALLING OR UPDATING DEVICE PROTOCOLS The D defau instal To ins 2 3 e C624M C 5 06 X8000 uses dynamic link library DLL files to support the various ATM dome and keyboard device protocols The DX8000 is shipped with a t set of protocols and devices for Pelco and other manufacturers As new devices or updates are made available the DX8000 allows you to new or update existing device protocols to support the new or current ATM dome and keyboard devices DLL files for Pelco devices supported by the DX8000 are provided by Pelco DLL files for other manufacturer devices supported by the DX8000 are provided by the respective vendor tall or update a device PTZ POS or keyboard in the DX8000 nsert the CD containing the Pelco DLL files in the DX8000 CD drive n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed Click Install The Protocol Install dialog box opens Click Browse and located the DLL files for the device Click Update Click Exit 163 DATA BACKUP SETUP Video data recorded on the DX8000 can be backed up to a variety of media The backup pro
90. 00 Lobby O TEAC CDw552E M2 10132004 101500 10132004 101500 East Entrance 5 6 DVD R RW O3 10132004 13 00 00 13 0200 West Entrance E Not installed mE 14 00 00 10 13 2004 14 41 06 Security Entrance 2 6 Hard disk drives Ei 5g Remote drive M g 10 0 1 14 public users B E Removal drive a o ttl Delete Item File Name Security Entrance Apply D gt Export Format G AMI C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF Refresh Create folder Iv Audio Record Y Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous MepNelDiw_ DiscomectNeD F Enable deinterlacing fiter Export Cancel Figure 64 Exporting Selected Video C624M C 5 06 CHANGING A BOOKMARKED TIME RANGE To change a bookmarked time range or create a new time range to be exported 1 Selectthe desired row in the Time Range table 2 Double click the Start Day field and then use the spinner buttons to set the start date for the export The start days and times cannot be set later than end days and times 3 Double click the Start Time field and then use the spinner buttons to set the start time for the export 4 Double click the End Day field and then use the spinner buttons to set the end date for the export 5 Double click the End Time field and then use the spinner buttons to set the end time for the export 6 Select the check box next to each time range you would like to export
91. 06 Front Paneland Power SWITCI 2n teh pets p nirien ERA pale awed A eor Ee UR RE Pa Re RR 15 DX8000 DVR Main Window 20 View Panes and Panel for 4 Division Display 0 0 00 RR e 27 Example of Single 4 9 and 16 Division View Panels iiiisissssssssssssssssss re 28 View Panel dentition eee reo RETE Ier a RP NC Euge Ea 29 Mais MR NEP s n 31 Add to Favorites Dialog BOX se deep ttt b vp e RE o 35 Favorites Menu LIST iieri ecd ated ed adhe dece Cio gc bled Re iip a rada 36 Organize Favorites Dialog BOX 5 erred beret epe Ri exe RETE PROS dpud dr daga NIA FF Y Ra 36 Organize Favorites Dialog Box and List of Favorites and Folders 20 0 0 ccc cence een eee 37 Move to Folders Dialog BOX isc 22 reps Ree DRIVE DIS pex RIDDRRCARUSERPED IN RUBUS PRENDE 37 Live View OSD Panes DET 38 DX8000 DVR OSD Menu OPiS A pP iur pda QN M UE 39 Activating Instant Recording 40 OnsSereenP LZGontiallz as re cet bt re C eec e Fits Ud bentur Rubee me 42 A 42 PTZ Keypad with Camera Lens ControlS oooooocococoooococr ses e e eres 43 Mouse Wheel Z00M 0 2 ess see eee a e en 44 IC ul Edu SERERE TE Mmmm 46 Programming a PIGSOL doeet Ace a aan Ir epu te Ie eres qute sete ont eletti eed 47 ACTIVATING a Preset sa sedbue her A QI ad ee Dates A NERIS RES Mam s 47 Clearing a Preseli aida a DEVE Hrs ciat Se E Od ede b DR UOS a 48 Programming Pattetti e oso ec RUE EMEN OD I
92. 10 system administration212 system administrator obtaining user account16 system configuration language15 language setting14 printer adding14 time setting14 system ID143 system setup accessing the System page182 Ctrl Alt Del key enabling189 using189 DVR settings exporting182 importing184 Edit menu exporting from183 importing from184 export feature182 import feature184 language187 selecting187 supported languages187 log files exporting187 overview185 viewing a log file185 overview182 system time overview187 setting188 standard and daylight saving time188 video format selecting189 system time14 188 T TCP IP ports default 145 time system setting188 title bar20 toolbar20 25 tour preset46 55 224 transaction format152 parameters152 transaction filter predefined78 84 155 U upgrade policy hardware14 software14 user security level171 accessing user setup pagel 71 Administrator15 102 173 camera security access174 dwell time changing29 DX8000 accessing102 Guest user account16 pan tilt and zoom control operating41 Power User15 39 102 173 Restricted User23 29 172 173 Standard User account21 23 173 user access levels173 user accounts adding new users174 existing users deleting176 log in timeout setting176 modifying175 password changing175 user s group affiliation changing176 user accounts default173 user name and password16 V video images printing14 live
93. 143 To access network information such as IP and default gateway addresses 1 In the Network page click Network Information The IP Configuration information box appears 2 Click OK to return to the Network page LT x E Windows 2000 IP Configuration HostName 2 052661 Primary DNS Suffix Node Type IP Routing Enabled i WINS Proxy Enabled No Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix Desctiption ASUSTeK Broadcom 440x 10 100 Integrated Co Physical Address OD OC 6E 3F E8 FA DHCP Enabled No Autoconfiguration IP Address 10 10 0 170 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 10 10 0 1 DNS Servers Ee NetBIOS over Tcpip Disabled Figure 109 IP Configuration Information Box SETTING UP DNS WINS The DX8000 allows you to set up DNS or WINS services if your network supports these services Access the Network page to configure DX8000 DNS WINS services For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 To set up DNS WINS 1 In the Network page click the DNS WINS tab The DNS WINS page is displayed 2 Doone of the following e If you are using dynamic IP addressing through a DHCP server click the Obtain DNS WINS info from DHCP check box e Ifyouare using static IP addressing provide the following information in the approp
94. 2 is the only allowed setting by default e Baudrate e Parity e Data bits e Stopbits C624M C 5 06 149 5 Click Apply Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties The DX8000 interfaces with the KBD300A ATM POS and third party dome devices using Port 1 to Port 4 All ports are compatible with both RS 422 or RS 485 serial data communication standard This topic describes how to connect a device to the DX8000 using Port 1 to Port 4 Access the Network page to configure Port 1 to Port 4 communication properties For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 For information about the Port Device page refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 147 To configure Port 1 to Port 4 properties 1 Inthe Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select the port number you want to configure 3 Inthe device drop down box select a device ATM POS devices can use COM1 COMZ and Port 1 to Port 4 The KBD300A and third party dome devices use Port 1 to Port 4 For information on interfacing ATM POS devices to the DX8000 using COM1 or COM2 refer to Setting Up COM1 and COM Port Properties on page 149 4 Configure the following port settings using the drop down boxes provided e Interface mode e Baud rate e Parity e Data bits e Stopbits 5 Click Apply SETTING UP
95. 2006 w 07 zd 2e zd 00 Sj End 01 13 2006 07 zd 47 00 Transaction Information Device Name ATM 7POs07 Clo Transaction Number r Data Information Y Transaction with Exception Only i I Line Item Action Code CH Y Exception Code BANANA Start Search I Stop Search 6 ch Device Name Trans Date Time Exception ATMIPOSO1 2006 1 13 7 26 48 Yes F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 553 DATE 1 13 2008 TIME 7 26 48 NIE ene eee ATMIPOSOI 2006 1 13 7 26 59 ATMIPOSO1 2006 1 13 7 27 9 FENERE RT uu es s ATMIPOSO1 2006 1 13 7 27 23 Hiner is 1 ATM POSO1 2006 1 13 7 27 54 ed ee ATM POSOL 2006 1 13 7 28 30 Hee 1031 ATM POSOL 2006 1 13 7 28 59 Figure 53 Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exception Filters C624M C 5 06 SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS BY LINE ITEM The DX8000 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions that contain a unique line item Use the asterisk as a wildcard character to substitute for zero or more characters The search criteria is based on the following Channel Camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data Date time Date and time window within which the transaction s were recorded Line item The line item has the following guidelines Line item entries are not case sensitive Enter lower or uppercase characters Specify
96. 24M C 5 06 169 170 SELECTING A BACKUP MEDIA DEVICE You can back up video to a local or remote networked device Depending on your system configuration backup devices may include an optical drive such as a CD R or a DVD R an external drive or a network drive The DX8000 does not support exporting or backing up to CD RW and DVD RW disks but it does support exporting or backing up to CD R and DVD R disks To select the type of backup device you want to use 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen opens 3 Click the plus sign next to a backup device in the device list 4 Select the check box of the device you want to use 5 Make sure that the backup media selected is inserted in the drive and that the drive is ready If your DX8000 is connected to a network that supports shared folders and drives you can map a network drive by right clicking the Network Drive icon in the device list To map a network drive select Add Network Drive from the quick menu and follow the on screen directions To remove a drive mapping right click the Network Drive icon and select Remove Network Drive VIEWING BACKED UP VIDEO You must use the DX8000 Client application to view backed up video For more information about viewing backed up video refer to the section titled Viewing and Searching Backed Up Video in the Client online Help or Client Applications manua
97. 3 In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens 4 Select the radio button of the recording mode you want to configure Options are as follows e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS 5 Using the slider select a frame rate from 1 to 30 ips for the desired camera The eight camera DVRs only have eight sliders 6 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each camera you want to configure 7 Click OK 8 Click Apply at the Schedule page C624M C 5 06 135 136 Frame Rate Configuration x r 4 Normal C Motion C Alam C ATM POS 320240 320240 PS PS PS 15IPS PS PS PS PS Figure 101 Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box Setting the Advanced Frame Rate Q Both resolution and frame rate settings can be adjusted using the Advanced Frame Rate dialog box Access the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box to set the advance frame rate For information on accessing the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box refer to Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box on page 135 To set recording resolution and frame rates for each channel 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 In the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box click Advanced The advanced frame rate configuration controls are displayed 4 Select the r
98. 4 v Camera 5 v Camera 6 M Camera 7 v Camera 8 Y Camera 9 v Camera 10 M Camera 11 M Camera 12 v Camera 13 v Camera 14 M Camera 15 v Camera 16 Refresh 1 Cancel Apply 8b Figure 124 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address C624M C 5 06 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address An Administrator level user can connect DX8000s together even when the exact IP address of a remote DVR is not known To add a site successfully the following must be established Each DVR must be attached to the same TCP IP subnet or LAN The first three octets of the IP address of the DVR host or subnet must be known The range of addresses used in the last octet of the DVR host or subnet must be known To add a remote DVR site to the site when you do not know the IP address of the site C624M C 5 06 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Select the Search DX8000 radio button if it is not already selected Enter an IP address range to search for DVR sites a Enter the first three octets of the IP range you want to search as an example 10 10 1 b Enter the beginning value for the search range in the fourth octet as an example 001 c Enterthe final value for the search range in the text box provided as an example 254 Each octet of the IP address must be an integer number between 1 and 255 Click Find and then wait while the DX8000
99. 4M C 5 06 0 online Help190 on screen display add instant record icon to OSD40 customizing39 overview23 38 selections39 Audio Recording Background Color Camera Name Instant Recording POS PTZ Select All Site Name Video Recording operating modes function26 Display Search Setup instant record starting and stopping40 instant recording39 live recording41 operation and configuration user access level16 overriding other users102 P P protocol46 pan tilt and zoom PTZ control panel21 pan tilt and zoom control enabling38 focus command using46 operating41 preset programming46 programming guidelines46 protocols camera support41 pan tilt and zoom indicator38 pane panel background color23 channel camera assignment to27 configuring27 division display format27 division selection of27 hidden panels automatically cycling through29 hidden panels manually cycling through29 live playback video display of20 navigating between27 overview26 pane expanding and collapsing29 site name displayed in23 video viewing103 C624M C 5 06 parity150 password default15 recovery22 user15 Windows15 pattern activating46 48 50 clearing46 50 overview48 programming46 49 programming starting49 programming stopping49 protocols PTZ enabled cameras48 Phase Alternating Line PAL 135 ping port145 playback control panel21 playback timeline21 port and device communications properties ATM POS device dat
100. 5 06 167 DELETING AN EXISTING BACKUP SCHEDULE To delete an existing schedule 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The DX8000 setup screen is displayed 2 Click The backup configuration screen is displayed 3 Inthe Backup schedule table click the backup schedule you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click Apply INITIATING AN INSTANT BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8000 allows you to perform an instant backup routine The DX8000 displays different time setting options when you select instant backup In this case you are given quick access to select the backup device day and time channel record type and recording category Once you establish the backup schedule you can view the estimated backup size before starting the actual backup process The DX8000 provides initial default settings You can save time by accepting the following defaults e Backup time range The current day and time that you initiated the instant backup routine e Channel Record Type All channels e Categories All Recording To perform an instant backup 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click at The DX8000 setup screen is displayed 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen is displayed 3 In the Backup page do the following a Click Instant Backup The Backup Now dialog box opens b Click the selection check box for the device you want to receive the instant backup data 4 Do one of the following a loaccept backup schedule options
101. 6 Click Apply C624M C 5 06 205 206 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Video Loss Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever a camera attached to a DX8000 experiences a video loss event To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to video loss events 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Inthe Notification Items section do the following a Click the Video Loss check box b Click once in the Selected Channels field to the right of the words Video Loss The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Do one of the following e Click the check box of each channel you want to monitor for video loss detection events e lick Select All to monitor all channels for video loss detection e Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply SETTING UP E MAIL NOTIFICATION GROUPS The DX8000 allows you to set up groups to send an emergency notification to multiple users The DX8000 supports the following e Youcan create up to 32 e mail notification groups e Upto32 members can be assigned to each e mail group e Agroup can be notified in response to an alarm or motion detection event This section describes how to set up e mail notification groups and includes the following topics e Adding an E Mail Notification Group on page 206
102. 6 Window tog Viewer Dialog BOX zo tont ree ci AGE aS Ru EEUU ORIS ORE estela 186 Exporting alog Elles 4t shes ee aed eve b cet ae Rll te et 187 SystemiSet p TIME aca a E A A A aoe ee Ee NEEDED NRISTISRGm UNE Mea 188 External Monitor Automatic Mapping 92 External Monitor Manual Mapping ese dec ree eet epe deu th me p Aib Le Aaa 93 loading a Mapping Sequence ate creta epos 33 cd a Do red see bts datos S TOI tact 194 Modify a Mapping Sequences aee cem rn Ree VN De e tate EVA SEE Pudet x Rea e ed lode as 195 Delete a Mapping SEQUENCE aii sceptro ge eU DP qun e ti e eedem meme reg e we gee Sade Ur etie E Fa dla ds 196 Basic E Mail Notification SED cesos id eeu Eder RH Do nest Sarl eid esent 202 SIC A a dha stan wil ede aan ay 203 Add Userto E Mail Groups sio a is fo WIR IIPUCH UIS C See ais SV ERCIUPUN A NETTO 208 Remove User from E mail Group ooo 208 Modity MeribersATIDUEeS 54 sento er rosse Ope rA UR E RT m LAN oi ala ed ERIT MEUSE E 209 Sending E Mails toINGIVIGUAISS La bp mtd ei pee ret bade bett oett eA RR bed IER day RETI Pid pestes 210 Sending E M lls to Groups usen ee esse dS A ges RR E CI Prev E SA ERES 211 Software Upgrade Server Console 212 Selectiupgrade Package uc a rot heb beau d REDEEM BRURTEHPESO Spatial irnos 212 Open Dialog BOX o tere ette et ear beer n be e bed x e e e Pat Sub e RET CEN a PNE ed 213 Upgrade Package INfOrmatiOn ea Lem oat nep oed Pa bee eed e dede Let e ghi cb hd id
103. 70500 Security Lobby Delete Item File Name Security Lobby Apply Figure 66 Default File Names The default filename is constructed from the information displayed in the Start Day Start Time End Day and End Time columns To assign a custom file name for a time range 1 Verify that the check box of the row you want to rename is selected 2 Enter a file name for the file you want to export Export file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions 3 Click Apply The Apply button updates the Name field C624M C 5 06 98 f Device Time Range Optical disk drives ls gt StatDay StatTime EndDay End Time Y CD R RW O1 10132004 08 00 00 1013 2004 08 02 00 ch017101304_080000_101304 O TEAC CD W552 O2 10432004 101500 10 13 2004 10 16 00 choi to1304 101500 101304 99 DVD R RW O3 10132004 1300 00 10132004 130200 chot l01304 130000 101304 E o MM O4 10132004 140000 10132004 14 41 06 chor 101304 140000101304 pocas O5 1013 2004 150000 10132004 16 05 00 choi to1304 160000 101304 O 6 10 0 1 14 public users Ms 10132004 170000 10132004 170500 Security Lobby Removal drive O e Item File Name Security Lobby Apply 8 4 gt Export Format 1 AMI C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG Refresh V Audio Record Y Real Time ma Map NetDrv Disconnect NetDrv F Enable deinterlacing filter Figure 67 Renaming Export Time Ranges
104. 9 5 and from the PTZ keypad Figure 27 PTZ Control Panel C624M C 5 06 4 To navigate up and down camera menu choices do one of the following e Use the PTZ OSD Menu controls e Use the on screen PTZ controls or the focus and focus buttons 5 To select an option from the camera s on screen menu do one of the following e Onthe PTZ OSD Menu click Enter e Onthe keypad click the iris button 6 Click the iris button to cancel an option or select the Exit command You can also use the on screen PTZ controls with your mouse to navigate camera menus Click and drag the mouse up or down to move between menu options 7 Click the iris button to select the option or exit a menu when the cursor is at the Exit command P LUE a 4 zu o oma MV E rm D gt mmn NDT o m nc NHvz ww ER DON D nm Man T MDD ZH a Oo E m pal ont NDD M lt IX 4H AMM Anz Any mm T A EX E o Figure 28 Camera Setup Menu C624M C 5 06 SENDING AUXILIARY COMMANDS TO A DEVICE The DX8000 auxiliary feature allows you to control external equipment connected to the auxiliary outputs of Spectra domes or Esprit positioning systems The auxiliary function is implemented through the D protocol and P protocol In this case the attached camera and DX8000 must be configured to communicate using one of these protocols The Aux key selects the auxiliary mode Buttons 1
105. A to the DX8000 For information about connecting the KBD300A to the DX8000 refer to the DX8000 Installation manual e Configure the KBD300A communication settings Refer to the instructions below C624M C 5 06 161 Configuring KBD300A Communication Settings This section describes how to configure the KBD300A communication settings The KBD300A is interfaced to the DX8000 using Port 1 4 These ports support connectivity to the DX8000 using the RS 422 data communication standard A user supplied RJ 45 cable is required For information about using the KBD300A refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 58 To configure the KBD300A communication settings 1 Connect the KBD300A to the DX8000 to a RS 422 RJ 45 port On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click e The Network page is displayed In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the device drop down box select KBD300A Pelco In the Communication Port drop down box select the Port 1 4 to which the KBD300A is connected Configure the following port settings using the drop down boxes provided e Interface mode RS 422 e Baud rate 9600 e Parity ODD e Data bits 8 e Stop bits 1 Click Apply KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features The following table describes the KBD300A Standard Mode operational features Table AU KB300A Standard Operational Mo
106. ATM POS DEVICE PROPERTIES This section describes how to configure ATM POS device properties and includes the following topics e Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode on page 150 e Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 151 e Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 154 e Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 159 e Recording ATM POS Events on page 160 Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode The DX8000 supports two device modes e Single Mode Use the single mode to interface one ATM POS device to the DX8000 e Multimode Use multimode to connect multiple ATM POS devices to the DX8000 over one connection To select the device mode 1 he selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 2 the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 3 In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 or COM2 4 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration dialog box opens al he Device Mode drop down box select a mode Single mode is the default mode 6 Do one of the following e Toacceptthe setting and remain in the Device Configuration page click Apply e To accept the setting and return to the Port Device page and then click OK C624M C 5 06 7 Set up the ATM POS device data form
107. Alarm Record Link Settings Section 0 0 0 0 0 00 c cect ees 16 Event Recording Link Settings ATM POS Record Link Settings Section 2 20 00 sss 117 Event Recording Link Settings Video Loss Record Link Settings Section 0 0 0 0 0 ccc sees 117 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Motion Events 18 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events nnana iliis 119 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events 20 000 c cect ene eee 120 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events 20 00 00 ccc cece cece esses 121 Schedule Page 5 6 puesta tat cte capte ALS conecte ce doi ot tee RUMP Sella let Nuala ala s tein o gables 122 Filling In Recording Blocks in Schedule Grid siisteror en racino ie saoto barra masaa iar IRR n nnn aa 24 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode 0 0 2 2 corro 25 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes iiisisisssssssssssssssssse II e 26 Calendar Date Selections rd ea RR te E RR Ini tou DN t Lc s kata 2 Year View Calendar Quick Men ai secos ett e Laas een e poles quos Eee RM ties otal 2 Month View Page M lti Day Schedule 5 t rrr Pere oRRPLAPER IU D p UE go mus dane RAP MSS TRUE VIT 28 Month View Page Single Day Schedule ooo 30 Month View Calendar Quick Meni nscale E ema tret a cr pase OP A ERR RP CREE gnats 30 Month View Pages nt ee teh beta dd lcs
108. Assign a camera to a view pane b Assign the ATM POS device to the camera designated to record ATM POS events 4 Verify the following a The POS record indicator is yellow and flashing b The ATM POS record symbol flashes blue during an ATM POS event C The ATM POS events are displayed yellow in the timeline 3 ATHOS O amrosi amposn ampo ATMIPOSOA amos amposos armrccor ampose Panet 1 32 S02 CM cavea ns m 205 oao a armurccos amposio 00 01 00 M 04 05 08 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 00 21 22 33 4 LLL LLL eL LL LLL LLL LL LL f amposu AIMPOS12 w Pomona f Fog m 206 085842 AM 1 fles pa PTT hinumbo Ta recorded 98 101251 31M Figure 117 Recording ATM POS Transaction SETTING UP THE KBD300A KEYBOARD The KBD300A allows you to operate certain DX8000 live view display functions and control camera PTZ operations from a keyboard rather than a mouse When connected to the DX8000 server the KBD300A supports two modes the standard and shift mode The shift mode is entered by pressing the Shift button and is indicated by the lighting of the Shift button LED For information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A universal keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about using the KBD300A refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 59 In summary the steps required to set up the KBD300A for operation are as follows e Connect the KBD300
109. C 5 06 171 172 The following table describes the parts of the User page Table AX Parts of the User Page Item Part Description User name table Lists the authorized users User buttons Allows you to do the following e Add Opens the Add New User dialog box where you create a new user account Remove Deletes the selected user e Properties Opens the Properties dialog box where you view and modify user details e Set Password Opens the Set Password dialog box where you specify or modify the user s password User Groups Allows you to create user accounts for the following user groups e Administrator Group e Power User Group e Standard User e Restricted User Group The DX8000 allows the Admin to configure access rights to any user group for the following functions e Camera security e View live video e Operate PTZ Playback video e Set PTZ e Access Export menu For more information on the above user groups refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 173 and Definition of Camera Security Access on page 174 User Timeout Allows you to configure the amount of time a user is allowed to remain logged on to the DX8000 system before the system automatically logs them out The time period is from 5 to 60 minutes in increments of 5 minutes The manual setting allows the user to stay logged on to the DX8000 until the user is manually logged off Auto Login User
110. Click the radio button to select the Manual Camera Mapping mode b Click Load to load or modify an existing sequence The Load profile dialog box opens c Selecta profile d Click OK The DX8000 dialog box opens prompting you to append the sequence to the list e Click No to the Append option External Output r C Auto Camera Mapping Mode Load profile x Motion alarm override dwell x Panel Division Selection E EH EH EH EH Eid E Dwell time fia E 1 60 Seconds J Override monitor output in response to this type of event Motion detection Z S Manual Camera W Panel Division Selec Drag and Drop cameras fror 0 Min 30 Sec Chi Profile name Budin e o_o Cancel Ch 3 Ch 4 Use J Sequence No o x Min 1 Sec Load Save Override monitor output in response to this type of event Alarm inc UPS Motion alarm override dwell time s 1 60 Seconds Delete Apply E Figure 136 Loading a Mapping Sequence Cancel Apply C624M C 5 06 Modifying a Sequence Instance in the List To modify a sequence instance in the list 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card is installed The External Output page is displayed C624M C 5 06 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a b Click the
111. D ITEM xl wy TL eem Figure 116 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection Recording ATM POS Events To record ATM POS events 1 Set up the ATM POS device communication port In summary do the following a Assign the ATM POS device to a COM port and set up COM port properties For information refer to Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 149 b Select the ATM POS device mode For information refer to Se ecting the ATM POS Device Mode on page 150 C Create a data format for the ATM POS device For information refer to Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 151 d Assign the data format to the ATM POS device For information refer to Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 154 e Setup ATM POS exceptions For information refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 f Assign the exception to the ATM POS device For information refer to Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device on page 159 g Verify the ATM POS communication connection For information refer to Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 159 2 Setupa camera to record the ATM POS events a Setup the designated ATM POS camera for scheduled ATM POS recording b Configure the ATM POS link settings c Configure the ATM POS record link settings d Optional Configure the ATM POS PTZ link settings 160 C624M C 5 06 3 In the DX8000 application window do the following a
112. DX8000 only supports up to five remote connections To activate up to five remote sites i On the DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click e In the Site IP list select up to five DVR sites you want to activate Click Apply The new DX8000 server site s should now be listed in the Site tree MODIFYING A REMOTE SITE This section describes how to modify a remote site and includes the following topics Editing a Remote Site on page 181 Deleting a Remote Site on page 181 Editing a Remote Site To change the attributes of a remote site 1 9 10 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click 3 Select the site name you want to edit from the Site IP list by clicking its site name C ick Edit The Server Information dialog box opens Enter a new site name for the remote DVR Enter the new IP address of the remote site If necessary enter a base port number 9002 is the default Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change port numbers from their default values Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8000 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical If necessary enter an upgrade port number 9003 is the default Click OK Click Apply Deleting a Remote Site To delete an e
113. DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Dothe following a Click the To check box under To b In the drop down box select the group to which you want to send event notifications C Optional If you want to e mail a copy of the event notification to another group of users click the CC check box under CC d In the drop down box select the group you want to copy 5 Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification Enable Notification Full name Shipping Area DVR E mail Address J hindockdvr pelco com To ki ferson peleo com Add to Group ce fadevis pelco com Add to Group Delete Edit Manage Groups pping dock security event D lt 8000 r Mail Group E mail Group kjefferson pelco com Campus Guard Statior vbrown pelco com Campus Guard Statior pahn pelco com Campus Guard Statior gyang pelco com Campus Guard Statior mail SMTP mo domain1 pelco com fi Minute IV My E mail Server Requires Authentication T Stat 7 00 13 AM End 9 10 19 AM a El Server address fmt domain1 pelco com User name shipdockavr Password e i Test E mail Notification m Notification Items Event Selected Channels Motion 1 Alarm 2 O video Loss gt
114. E VR AT 62 Playback Timeless e a ede hr ce enr A DAS d oie CER car A E et eMe rad A deem AE E a 64 Playing Back Video bY TIME nerse opein Te c sate Se ok Attn A eee ae that neyo a ad Geen eae 65 Starting Playback from a Specific Point in Time 2 02 0 corr 65 Understanding Instant Playback ede REA cd 65 Playing Back Video DU EVEN d eo otc tette n eae too ee te es mers Tu Mele tet cem EENE er 66 Operating Playback Digital ZGOIm 23 5 cero E Rb deleted bd nd eder det per di delat pista dale hile EAR bsec 67 Zoom Using the Digital Zoom Control 67 Zoom Using the MOUSG ire Mi hs dtt ed e n oem e ntt ente A da ee Retos 68 PAM ING FAA OOMEM Images atan Du tee eet Bt Pape ge e mea toe ete ee icd RN Ue ete Prat fuat 69 Working Im Search MOE uo a en a ahd APRESII RIEN NE E Ee eeu ee RE en 70 SealchiVIFId aW 4 13 CE Za neis eee yai t cun Subs Og ens t ER Led susc bte the MIT xeu a oi RT 7 C624M C 5 06 Displaying a Deinterlaced Image in the Search Mode iiiiiiissssssssssssssssssssse I re 73 Index Video SC Archi sr unc enretre severe RO a FEOSPAPTIPQuI Ue QE pq Rr 73 Thumbnail Video Seat li 24 5 54er eU IDD da wild AR e enc EDU beu e cR Stau 74 POS seed wee Me as Sag oat es ate a ate ala AM RE RED PE EV et dp stor ie E 76 Understanding the ROS Search VIGW cr JJ atte Tete e een e n ese A e ves esq vs 77 Searching and Displaying POS Data by Device Name iiiiisisissssssssssssssssss II 80 Searching P
115. Error 07 27 2005 16 17 35 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 C Waming Error 07 27 2005 13 23 23 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Eror 07 25 2005 074534 W38VC 105 NI DX8000 aut Error 07 22 2005 14 05 20 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 22 2005 14 03 23 SDDrv 43 NIA DX8000 Audit Success Error 07 21 2005 07 07 26 W3SVC 105 N A DX8000 Error 07 18 2005 01 02 16 w38vC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 14 2005 09 19 30 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 14 2005 09 17 07 SDDw 43 NIA DX8000 Error 07 13 2005 14 59 33 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 14 35 15 W38SYC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 14 33 37 SDDw 43 NIA DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 14 32 13 SDDw 43 NIA DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 01 05 44 Ww38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 06 2005 15 05 18 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 06 2005 08 48 38 W3SYC 105 NIA DX8000 07 01 2005 09 28 44 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 NR 28 2NNS 1140927 Waser Ni menona cm Figure 131 Window Log Viewer Dialog Box C Audit Failure 5 Do one of the following e Click OK to close the log dialog box e lick Clear to erase the log C624M C 5 06 Exporting Log Information To export a system log file 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 In the Choose drop down box select a log file 4 Click Save As 5 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the log file 6 Enter a filename for the log information in the space provided Log filenames follow standard Wi
116. Exporting DVR Settings Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export To save current DVR settings 1 From the DX8000 menu bar choose Edit gt Export Setup The DX8000 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Select the folder where you want to save the settings file 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 4 Enter a file name in the space provided 5 Click Save C624M C 5 06 183 184 WORKING WITH THE IMPORT FEATURE This sections describes how to import DX8000 DVR settings and includes the following topics e Importing DVR Settings on page 184 e Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Import on page 184 Importing DVR Settings To import a saved settings file 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click q The System page is displayed 3 Select the Import radio button 4 Doone ofthe following a Tospecify the file name to import enter the drive path and file name information in the text box Settings file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions For example enter C System Settings Backup bak or b To browse for a location 1 Click Browse The DX8000 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Navigate to the drive and folder where the settings file is located 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 4 Select the settings file you want to open 5 Click Open 5 Click Import Now
117. Mail Notification Groups dte soe A des m e Eh tr eor adul ete en idm a tates 206 Agding an E Mall Notification Group zat RIU Te RR RI RS INQUE nee Homes Sag UR MEIN PSY Pede 206 Modifying ai E Mail Group NaMe esre erti cel id aisla 207 Deleting anE Mail Groupe set cs tempe t tee se TP ERR Neb wees LE d SERM RE Ad 207 Adding Members to an E Mall GEOUD s cesi rre rit ipe eR ORUM m OR ARN qs 207 Deleting Members from an E Mail Group iiissssssssssssssssssse II t ebb nee es 208 Modifying E Mail Group Member Attributes 2 00 cnc e 209 Sending E Mail Notifications ss o s t tecta eee best orte de de D abr epe bad xp e e e leg etes 210 Sending E Mail Notifications to Individuals siiis nc nnn n eee 210 Sending E Mail Notifications to Groups 2 0 oo 211 Administering the XG000 ciat so cs a cetus A di e EODD MU EOD a e let NER nen ies ed cta 212 Updating the DX8000 Server and Client Applications isiisissssssssssssssssse IRR nnn teens 212 Hecovaririg a A hac dele ern ele dese il Mates ce NU eal ala NG a ele BU d cerco LL e ete s 215 Itl exa oc core het Siehe ene tese toL AL tata den Np La SAI el dt tub Ne talca 217 C624M C 5 06 List of Illustrations ee NOP WN DAAONDAHPWN C O0101O0101010101010101 3 Ss SH PHP FP PHS WwW WOWWWWWWWNNNMNNNNNNNDN gt OOANDOTF OUN CO CO OO O0 O1 4 CO FO O0OOCONODAROAOAN CO CO CO OD O1 4 CO NO CO cO CO C624M C 5
118. OPERATIONS PROGRAMMING DX8000 Series Digital Video Recorder Server Software Application C624M C 5 06 Contents Operation and Programinilig sss toe pr A Gate EE adap de dc Rd elio Re Died ates 13 Waelcome tothe DXBODU Series DVR cacas dia 13 DX8000 Client Emergency Agent usine prster A epu UE D e Nate TATUR ue tpa dor ce UR dus 13 DG ui costra a 13 DXBODOMOBII amp GIIBnE ute eto hee ds di ee ede ca tn a seid latis 13 DX8000 Webi Cleit PP 13 Getting Started with DX8000 DVR Software 14 Mo eso dejo TED 14 Software Upgrades o eiie deve Re a DR EIN USRRES 14 Hardware Upgradbs yx sate cage E AREE RARE PEN EU Rif LANES LT PEL EL PE dus 14 Starting and Shutting Down the DXB00B vic curre eet eto ee A ese RIVA 15 Starting the DXSOD esis aan UgD e px D DE ash wes pasta cdd dea oed Edad 15 Sh tting Down the DXB UU sii A A eR dex at D au sed eyed Rn aep 15 DX8000 DocuUmbttatlOnrs sce dee eR T cR cR eU nent eR RR D d T EAE E qd Dude 15 Logging In to the DX8000 Application o ooooo eR RI RI I I I Ile 16 A A A oe ee peach Sek Sean 16 Logging in to a Local DX8000 iisssssssssssssssssse RI E EEEE EEEE beeen EEE 16 Logging Qut of the Local DX8000 ace eee eder e bred e ce eee era bear wing e die ana sur shoe 16 Exiting to the Windows Operating Systems ui ree omes ere a aia 17 Remote DXBOOO LOGIN s s samet tiet ptt EE hk te ti bubben pe n bte ai
119. OS D ta by Device Nama tara ER RR ER AR dd bet aaah 80 Displaying POS Data Discovered by Device Name iiiisssissssssssssssssss II 81 Searching by POS Transaction Number 82 Searching for All Transactions with Exceptions 2 2 0 0 auauua ccc IIR t een n eee 83 Searching for Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exceptions llis 84 Searching for Transactions by Line Item clie a fy ede eb EPA tab PRX adverts 85 Searching for Transactions by Action Code 0 0 0 ss I nee e eee 86 Pixel Video Sgar i a uu 2 ect esa dib ene ios Sete tae EU ane CEN GN ME Ads A Ce Am O Milas xd a tails 87 Searching Video Based on Changes in Screen Pixels 2 2 00 ect e 87 Miewing a video Thutmbtiall ester e oeste AREE tr MALE SEA So ERE S S MEA n d da a o 89 Working with Special View and Search Methods 20 00 00 cece eben teen eens 90 Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode 2 0 0 IRR les 90 Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously 20 0 0 000 occ rr 90 Exporting VIGGO on nte eter e es e Ma 91 Exporting Bookmarked Video Regions 0 RII e 91 Creating BODKITIAI KS 2t e ches is be EE UO etd Saad ee Gleb blak diei onboard 92 Clearing Bookmarks excede Se Sese a teet rto ee ade dle ate ota tbt eher apace tas 92 Glearing a stngleBobKmial kc a de tre E Ore eee PE RONDE ee dE 92 Clearing All BOOKITIa KS 5 ek eer tton ete EYE io akg wets WR Y Nu E TRUE A RE eM C REM 93 Inseting and Removing a USB Flash Dive cc
120. OrdINg men turai rd er ORE LO e LES Bu ASO LA SIL IA cds cats Neb sea 39 Enabling and Disabling Instant Recording 0 ccc IRR bn been teen teen eens 39 Enablingnstant Recording cu fees ana ees oe lB RR LEE er ea he ol alee beet eet TEN Mc 40 Disabling Instant Recording erre Rc a EU Ee e SEES ER me pe eee ee Pea Rt 40 Adding Instant Recording to 09 Dis ces scs o ety EORR ERG RO loe bbb REN Rea utt dn 40 Starting and Stopping Instant Recording mar eneore E E E e 40 otarting Instant Hecordillgs sev obe Co Ee ad RN oeste dE aoa Pd 41 Stopping Instant Recardihni s sss reb tec A a AS TESI NES 41 Operating the On Screen Pan Tilt and Zoom PTZ Controls ssssssssssssssssssssseRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 41 Operating the PTA a A A A A E X ENS 41 Adjusting the Gamera a A E A ia at aed 43 Adjusting the Camera ZOOM ciernes dabas et a added il dobla 44 Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions 0 0 20 0 0 cece ccc cee ccc eens 45 JAVA MTM 46 Programming Presea secedere bob fume ate x eroi eremita bd Utere red dd ae 46 Activating a Preset 5o acne cete ele OL esse a PO Ea T Mh eye te d egets lite 47 Clearing a Preset cus D eat eek ru I EPI Tes SUP PSU eds Sa aces Se a IA Ve Re E IV eee ed ea 48 P LZ Pattetrisa tl a a m etu deed e CAE o a O veri s E Rem em tt Mi d 48 Programming axPattetri a AS A DERE SE A A A Sd RENS 49 A A oe tee A RN 50 Clearing a Patterns A ds aire a a tile eink San ieee OPAL S
121. S event ATM POS address selecting114 ATM POS recording mode setting up124 linking relay to114 recording160 ATM POS exceptions assigning to an ATM POS device159 creating157 deleting159 editing158 exception action codes defined155 modifiers158 overview78 84 155 audio108 audio indicator38 auxiliary feature external equipment54 how used54 protocols supported54 backed up data backup schedule creating166 deleting168 editing167 instant starting168 overview165 media device selecting170 network device backing up to169 overview164 viewing100 164 170 bandwidth throttle options 145 base port145 baud rate150 C calendar See schedule camera alarm input linking to camera33 assigning all cameras to view panes32 assigning to a view pane32 35 audio108 217 D P or Coaxitron protocol support46 event detection repositioning PTZ preset patterns linked to alarm events119 ATM POS events120 motion events118 video loss events121 external event recording alarm event linking multiple cameras to record116 ATM POS event linking multiple cameras to record117 motion event linking multiple cameras to record116 video loss event linking multiple cameras to record117 lens adjusting43 mapping191 motion detection zones107 PC keyboard using shortcuts to operate PTZ and lens functions45 PTZ protocols105 Coaxitron DX8000PELCO C D protocol DX8000PELCO D disable protocol DX8000NO PTZ P protocol DX8000PELCO P recording
122. Second X Pre Alarm Image Quality BEST X ATM POS Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution zo 2240 Frame Rate During Event 30 ImagesiSecond Pre Event Frame Rate o ImagesiSecond Pre Event Image Quality BEST Motion Image Quality gesr Instant Recording Enable Frame Rate Configuration Configure Relays Pre Motion 30 Seconds X Post Motion 60 Seconds X v Figure 100 Examples of Alarm Image Quality BEST Pre Alarm 30 Seconds Post Alarm so Seconds Follow Event Custom Camera Settings The following table describes the settings for the supported modes Event Image Quality EEST X Pre Event 30 Seconds X Post Event 50 Seconds X r Table AF Camera Settings for the Supported Recording Modes Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS Image Resolution Image Resolution Image Resolution Image Resolution Frame Rate Frame Rate During Motion Frame Rate During Alarm Frame Rate During ATM POS Image Quality Pre Motion Frame Rate Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre Alarm Frame Rate Pre ATM POS Frame Rate Pre Motion Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre Alarm Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre ATM POS Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Motion Image Quality Best High Nor
123. TM POS configuration settings derived from the following e Data format e ATM POS exceptions e Exception action codes For information about setting up ATM POS transaction and data options refer to Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 150 Data Window Area where recorded transaction data is displayed Data Overlay Box The function is not supported at this time Video Window Area where live and playback recorded video is viewed Playback video is started at the date and time specified for the respective transaction data as shown in the POS Search table The DX8000 playback controls are used to view playback video C624M C 5 06 79 SEARCHING AND DISPLAYING POS DATA BY DEVICE NAME You can perform a general search for POS transaction data record for a particular ATM POS device and its associated camera Use the date and time and ATM POS device name as the search criteria The search results contain all POS transactions recorded for that device according to the specified date and time Searching POS Data by Device Name To search POS transaction data by ATM POS device name 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ifa 2 Onthe Search control click O The POS search view is displayed 3 To select a channel in the DX8000 Site tree click a camera that is linked to an ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text
124. TZ preset must be set in order to create a preset tour The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to configure preset tours and includes the following topics e Programming a Preset Tour on page 55 e Activating a Preset Tour on page 58 e Deactivating a Preset Tour on page 58 PROGRAMMING A PRESET TOUR This section describes how to program a preset tour and includes the following topics e Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 55 e Adding Presets to a Tour on page 56 e Deleting Presets from a Tour on page 57 Accessing a Preset Tour Group To access the Preset tour group dialog box 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX 2 On the DX8000 keypad click and then on the PTZ keypad The Preset tour group dialog box opens 3 Select the preset tour 1 4 that you want to program from the drop down box 4 Doone ofthe following e To add presets to a tour refer to Adding Presets to a Tour on page 56 e To delete presets from a tour refer to Deleting Presets from a Tour on page 57 Preset tour group xj Available presets Number Name DwelTime sec Preset01 2 Preset02 Preset03 2 Preset04 2 Preset05 2 PresetflR 2 Jooo00k Add to Group Preset Tour Group v 01 6
125. VICE nce v Re Ret Soe ene edie ra HER 169 Disconnecting from a Network DriVe ioseri bite ee Giada ERI TERIDALAltcmedqpebbbbhe rubi bites 169 Selecting Back p M dia Device uo a A A YR PITE eel 170 Viewing Backed Up Video iisusssssssssssssssssssse se I e e e ee n n nnn 170 User Set ss Loose Let aedes Sa Goh bte t IS eet idees Goode mili bad Lets tede dta Sade kp depen 171 Accessing the User Page is sae ater o atid Cad os BO csi da tat x t SLE mte ap tin ia e hata ats 171 Bulli User ACGOURIS 252 D obice tL RR DUE tU ood n eed id eda wan ad Pas 73 Definition of User Access Levels 2 2 0 0 nnan cece ees e n 173 Definition of Camera Security ACCESS 174 Adding New SBrs 2 orca eR reu oe dele hatte A A eek ee eee 174 Modifying User Properties neo ute te rt dot rt te e e dn deat da uS t ee dS 175 Changing User PassSWONdS vs 153 epe a A UE RON ERU SE aL Maina bes REMUNIIAAG Rua queres 175 Ghangirig a User s Group ATAN x 2s in op RETE I REPERI teas a he a UTERIS 176 Deleting Existing USES ust rumpere ee RUE EGRE e Po eee Ge 176 SELLING LOGIN A STR a ese coin eode Wie las E crue E tena d E Wale ce E o eset 176 Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User iiiiiisiissssssssssssssssss sss tebe e eee e eee ee 177 Sie SetU veto Shen Bie eie Nee iD ac NAM 177 Adding a Remote Site 0e doe oreet eto Dac e bad tem teet ho o Pt s aote eco e de e ee 177 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address iiiiiiiiiissssssss
126. a is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data To search for only POS events by transaction with exception 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click al 2 On the Search control click OM The POS search view is displayed 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following e n the DX8000 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected e Dothe following 1 In the Transaction Information section click check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Set the date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section click check box to select Transaction with Exception Only The Exception Code check box is available 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid and if transactions with exceptions were recorded during the time range the transactions are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 Inthe POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 8 On the playback controls click Forward Playback The video recorded for the transaction is displayed in the Video window Playback Stat for 1
127. a format151 mode selecting150 COM1 and COM2 setting up149 COM1 COM2 port148 overview1 47 RS 232148 RS 422 RS 485148 port numbers changing145 preset activating46 47 clearing46 48 guidelines46 Preset 9546 Preset 9946 programming46 preset tour accessing a preset tour group55 adding presets to a tour55 56 configuring55 delete presets from a tour55 deleting presets from a tourb7 programming55 printing14 protocols D P Coaxitron46 device installing updating163 PTZ OSD menu control51 PTZ presets and patterns alarm events linking to119 ATM POS events linking to120 motion events linking to118 video loss events linking to121 221 reboot automatic automatic reboot190 record indicator38 recording mode alarm camera settings supported alarm image quality134 frame rate during alarm134 image resolution134 post motion134 pre alarm134 pre alarm frame rate134 pre alarm image quality134 ATM POS camera settings supported ATM POS image quality134 frame rate during ATM P0S134 image resolution134 post ATM P0S134 pre ATM P0S134 pre ATM POS frame rate134 pre ATM POS image quality134 instant39 instant disabling40 instant enabling40 motion camera settings supported frame rate during motion134 image resolution134 motion image quality134 post motion134 pre motion134 pre motion frame rate134 pre motion image quality134 normal39 normal camera settings supported frame rate134 image quality134 image resolution134 re
128. a remote DVR does not disconnect you from that system Logging out will return you to the Guest account To disconnect from a remote server refer to Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 17 You can only log out of one server at a time If you are logged into multiple servers you must log out of each server individually You can also log out of a local or remote DVR by right clicking its site name from the Site tree and selecting User Log out from the quick menu To log out of a local or remote DVR site From the DX8000 menu bar choose File gt User Log out C624M C 5 06 Understanding the DX8000 Application Window This section describes the DX8000 application window and its operation The application window is the central control center from where you have access to the DX8000 features and functions e View both live and recorded video Exit to the Windows environment Access DX8000 setup features Control camera pan tilt and zoom functions Select cameras for viewing and recording e Specify playback date and time Access playback controls This section includes the following topics e Description of the DX8000 Main Window on page 19 e Understanding View Panes and Panels on page 26 e Working with the Site tree on page 31 DESCRIPTION OF THE DX8000 MAIN WINDOW The application window is displayed after the DX8000 starts The main window provides access to both live and recorded video This section describes the DX8000 ma
129. ace E aae DTA gH EL ED PARIS ERST RISE RM RA NITE S TRA dam MT 187 DEMING System MEn sao d eoe vitre e Uude eo Ut hu RUN Da bti Si stats 188 Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time liiiiiiiiiiisssssssssssssssss eI 188 Selecting the VideO Format tear entr etes a dik a ce c I Dee ca a ca tine be ER CR eU p Ser ar Rd 89 Working with GtrkeAIteDel F BEti on 1s cee bis Pp htt kb reete qe d eret Seld lc Llodra 189 Enabling GAIA tc ao vest emo Td du Ee URN ds ahs ems east PE RIS 189 Using GtrEeATtEDel s s direc eed teo dee Nc tee e s dtd 189 Set ng Up Auto RebOOb r tit bar e o a v ee ducibus ter fete ede ru E Loa ot adu 90 Working withignline Help 25 5255 du ad IRR p ede iunt da qx ipei bia ur etd da ecd 90 7 External MOriitor Setilp s tote tk e dan E Y ebbe s eed e ee na be nw s e dete 91 Accessing the External Monitor Set p c rire Mes Us E sale coed eats e nelea nae REGN 191 Setting Up Camerai Mapping sas RE READER CX PER Ru RUPEE SUL Pantie means idol 91 Setting Up Automatic Camera Mapping 191 setting Up Manual Camera Mapping 5 5 tr atte e E en bb Ea ee e RE Ri e Og eee 192 Contiguring Display Overrides xs ure mc eet UU rq ET qr et Teste om NEWER E ORES 197 Using the External Monitor Optlolm a se et er nto OE Oe SE LER DUE PESE Sd aiuto Sa 197 Emergency Notification Setups decease rtd ade RR Reel toc buys d A eR vu dice a Ra aa 198 Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setu
130. adio button of the recording mode you want to configure Options are as follows e Normal e Motion e Alarm e AIM POS 5 Select resolution values for individual channels from the drop down boxes The following table describes the available resolution values Setting a resolution value for one recording mode sets the resolution value for all modes For example setting resolution to 640 x 480 in Motion recording mode will change the resolution to 640 x 480 in Normal and Alarm recording modes as well Table AG Resolution Values Video Format NTSC PAL CIF 320 x 240 352 x 288 2CIF 640 x 240 704 x 288 ACIF 640 x 480 704 x 576 2CIF 720 x 240 720 x 288 ACIF 720 x 480 720 x 576 C624M C 5 06 C624M C 5 06 Using the Maximum Frame Rate Settings sliders set the maximum frame rate for each resolution Setting the maximum frame rate for a resolution will impose a limit on how high frame rates can be set on individual channels using that resolution In certain cases setting a lower maximum frame rate for a particular resolution may free up resources to be used by channels set at another resolution In any case frame rates cannot be set for any channel or resolution beyond the availability calculated by the DX8000 To set a global frame rate for all channels of a particular resolution type move the slider under Global Frame Rate Settings Select a frame rate from 1 to 30 ips according to the available ca
131. alog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 In the Video Loss Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected Video Loss Channel 5 Click Apply Video Loss Channel CAMERAOT Camera Name Camera 1 E Link Settings R2 R3 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 Figure 79 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section LINKING CAMERAS TO RECORD IN RESPONSE TO EXTERNAL EVENTS Multiple cameras can be configured to begin recording in response to detected motion alarm ATM POS transaction and video loss events This section describes how to link cameras to record in response to these events and includes the following topics e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Motion Events on page 116 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events on page 116 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 117 e linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events on page 117 C624M C 5 06 115 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Motion Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to motion detection events 1 Le On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Eve
132. am into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transaction Every field format must match that of the ATM or POS device especially the month format To create a data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 3 Inthe selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 4 Click the Data Format tab 5 In the Data Format page click Add The Data Format dialog box opens 6 Using the information from the transaction record or other source set the parameters for the following Data Format sections as applicable e Transaction Format e Monetary Format e ime Format e Character Format 7 Click OK 8 Verify that the new data format is listed in the Data Format List on the Data Format page Editing a Data Format The DX8000 allows you to edit a data format Once you click OK to accept the changes you cannot undo the changes To edit an existing data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 3 Inthe Data Format List highlight the name of a data format 4 Click Edit The Data Format dialog box opens 5 Verify that the name of the data format you want to edit is displayed in the
133. amera Recording Mode 0 e le 24 Scheduling a Record Mode ics 5 Ls n rs tob e ael lr c eeu LIMEN Mai trends 24 Glearing a schedu led Reeordilig 5 2 sae yas o be eec shade ute er coenae e o e RE Spb ed pub dS 25 Creating Yearly Recording Schedules eat caido Roe DR bei vba e Lod pone etd etae ER RR Lak Td ias cq 26 Cr ating a Yearly Recording Schedule ti ee a E UI ee A Y 26 Scheduling Individual Days Using the Year View 20 0 I 27 Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day 02 0 0 e 27 Creating Monthly or Multiple Day Recording Schedules 0 0000 0 c ccc c cece een e 28 Creating M ltiple Day Schedules ssc ar 2 rep A EH RE NER EE ru 28 Creating single Day Schedules ssas aca eke v ae aks oe Ne IE oa Wale eS ois Paese e AS 29 Editing Sehediles i ids oen ct het Wieden epe Ur roges ditte sta ee bbc degen Dt inis ded 131 Changing an Existing Schedule Profile oooooooococococoocococoro rro rr 31 BDeletirig an Existing schedule Pri deeem ety bee Y ane ade wb Land xw xd etuer ges 32 Working with Custom Camera Settings ooooooooocoococo Ih 33 Configuring Custom Camera Settings n n sssaaa aniano reee EEE EEEE EEEE he 33 Examples of Custom Camera Settings 0 000 00 coc EEEE EEEE EEEE ehe 134 Contiguring the Frame Rate ss erroten ette dA ee Sate tege o Sa e teda kee aetate teil gt sns 35 Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box 0 0 0 cette ene eee 135 setting the BasieE
134. an ATM POS Device ooooooocococococo e Ie t nnn eee ee 59 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection 2 2 0 0 I ne 160 Recording ATM POS Transactions tdci ettet T er p ren etl Fd atk OE eu dac gah wo haw a 161 Backup Configurar a acute TE A A AA NSW TRU MR NIIUISRCYS MISI TIS 164 Add Backup Schedule Dialog BOX 166 Editing an Existing Backup scheduless 2 id e Rr dab xe eR EMIT Rr E baal alll 167 Instant Record Backup Now Dialog BOX 225252 olaaa id da lt a ise Ded eee e bee elle 169 User Page soe eet et ca ede eek ee ERE E ln AN NC e UO EN ee Ve alae Pe us 171 Add New User Dialog BOX am ortam Re ent po ese do aps bp dent PEE On UD des i i ped 175 C624M C 5 06 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 C624M C 5 06 Adding a Site with a Static IPAddress Js rrt eR RR LEY EN Al Uu alee EITHER 78 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IPZAddEBSs edi Ehre iio 19 Finalizirig SIteSet p z cis shaban uet ORE X Rete haute Ws rote al epe Pre ble kata bo Valais RAV ME 180 Exporting DVR Settings a sodio eei a T OR ur oe n esae ta codes ctt us a tod ena m tct et 183 Import DX8000 Server CorfiguratiDIz7 sce Sede e Pob bbc dad rtl tbe ee RI D tdt Seas 84 Miewinig a Fog Hllez i x eue Rime ex ios 185 Log View Dialog BOX ossis eroe eee Dee ett emer ten tae pe a tos stt titres dans Dot ale Punta E Pd 18
135. ances follow the directions in the sections above 8 Click Save 9 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name to save the sequence list 10 Click OK 11 Click Apply in the Sequence Table section 12 Click Apply CONFIGURING DISPLAY OVERRIDE The MUX display card can be configured to interrupt normal output when a motion or alarm event is detected Each event instance causes live video from the sensing camera to be displayed for up to sixty seconds after event detection To set up event monitor override options 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card has been installed 3 Select the type of event that will be allowed to override the monitor output e Alarm input e Motion detection 4 Set the dwell time an event will be allowed to override the screen 1 60 seconds 5 Click Apply USING THE EXTERNAL MONITOR OPTION To assign a sequence profile to an external analog monitor 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click 4 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click The External Monitor drop down menu is displayed 3 Select a profile from the External Monitor drop down menu C624M C 5 06 197 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION SETUP 198 The Emergency Agent Notification alerts selected clients of motion alarm and video loss events detected by DX8000 server sites When a motion alarm or video loss event is tri
136. and connected to a secured private network and you must be logged in with either Power User or Administrator access to configure network software settings You must reboot the DVR for any network configuration changes to take effect This section describes how to setup network access and includes the following topics e Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 e Setting Up DHCP on page 144 e Setting Up a Static IP Address on page 144 Setting Up DX8000 Network Access To begin the network setup process 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click e The Network page is displayed 3 Click the Network tab if it is not already visible 4 Enter a new name for your DVR in the Site Name field Site names can be up to 30 characters in length The default site name is DX8000 5 Enter a unique System ID for your DVR in the System ID field System IDs must start with a letter must be 15 characters or less and cannot include spaces or special characters Your DVR s site name is used to identify your system to clients and other DX8000 servers Your DVR s system ID is used to uniquely identify your system on a local area network LAN System IDs are required to prevent possible conflicts with other network devices 6 Setupthe Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or static IP options For information on setting up DHCP or static IP addressing refer to Setting U
137. ar on the screen below the search grid Each thumbnail contains the first image of recorded video for the listed time period e Double clicking a thumbnail will cause it to begin playing e Click and to move backwards and forwards through thumbnails To view a video thumbnail 1 Click a thumbnail The thumbnail s search parameters date and time are displayed below the search grid The thumbnail s search start time is a few seconds ahead of the search start time you entered Ele Ed View Epot Favor Hep 07 212005 07 10 46 015 2 AAA l EEE 0D 01 02 03 04 05 05 07 06 cf 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 10 19 20 21 22 20 4 LLL LL 1 1 L Y G aT 1 1 1 1 42 1 1 1 21 4 1 1 1 ee Tesis ps mmm on ARANDA Figure 57 Thumbnail Images Marking Pixel Changes 2 To locate playback at the start of the first image click NN The video scene is played back and displayed in reverse 3 Click V to pause the video play back when the beginning of the first recorded is reached 4 Click Playback starts and the video scene is displayed 5 Click to remove the thumbnail results C624M C 5 06 89 WORKING WITH SPECIAL VIEW AND SEARCH METHODS 90 The DX8000 allows you to do the following e View video in the deinterlaced mode e View live and playback video simultaneously e View and search backed up video You must use the DX8000 Client application to view and search backed up video For more information refer to
138. ar the bottom of the Schedule page to configure the recording mode for each camera This section describes how to schedule a recording mode and includes the following topics e Scheduling a Record Mode on page 124 e Clearing a Scheduled Recording on page 125 Scheduling a Record Mode To schedule a record mode for one or more channels 1 From the DX8000 toolbar click Iq The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the check box for the record mode you want to apply to a channel e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS The following table describes the record modes Table AE Record Modes Mode Color Description Normal Green Continuous recording Motion Blue Recording is triggered during the selected time block if a motion event is detected in the camera s predefined motion field For information on motion detection refer to Motion Detection Setup on page 107 Alarm Red Recording is triggered during the selected time block when an alarm is activated At least one alarm must be linked to the camera for this option to work For information on alarms refer to Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 33 ATM POS Yellow Recording is triggered during the selected time block if an ATM or POS event is detected in the camera s predefined ATM POS field For information on ATM POS detection refer to Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 117
139. are registered trademarks of Pelco Endura ExSite and Spectra IIl are trademarks of Pelco Adobe and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Nero is a registered trademark of Nero AG DLP is a registered trademark of Texas Instruments Inc Copyright 2006 Pelco All rights reserved PELCO Worldwide Headquarters 3500 Pelco Way Clovis California 93612 USA USA amp Canada Tel 800 289 9100 Fax 800 289 9150 International Tel 1 559 292 1981 Fax 1 559 348 1120 www pelco com 1509001 United States Canada United Kingdom The Netherlands Singapore Spain Scandinavia France Middle East
140. are runs on a standard pocket PC based Personal Digital Assistant PDA and can display a single channel of real time video from any camera attached to any DX8000 DVR on the network Features include hierarchical organization of multiple sites built in security through password protection and an adjustable viewing area including full screen view DX8000 WEB CLIENT The DX8000 Web Client allows you to view live video and operate pan tilt and zoom PTZ features of cameras attached to DX8000 DVRs Using a standard web browser you can remotely monitor up to 16 cameras from up to five DX8000 DVR servers simultaneously Each DX8000 DVR can support up to 100 web clients either internally within an organization or externally through the Internet C624M C 5 06 13 Getting Started with DX8000 DVR Software This section provides information to help you get started with using the DX8000 DVR server software You must install your DX8000 Series DVR before using this guide In order for your system to operate properly you must also perform the following tasks e Read the Important Security Information for System Administrators manual and configure the DX8000 to ensure maximum DX8000 server operation security e Change the default language if other than English For more information refer to Selecting the Language on page 187 e Set the system clock For more information refer to Setting the System Time on page 187 e identify network parameters
141. at For information on setting up the ATM POS device data format refer to Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 151 Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format The DX8000 allows you to create a data format for each ATM POS device You can assign a unique name to each data format The data format values determine how data from ATMs or POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transaction Every field format must match that of the ATM or POS device especially the month format Access the Network page to configure the data format For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 For information about the Port Device tab refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 147 This section describes how to create a data format template and includes the following topics e Understanding the Data Format Page on page 151 e Creating a New Data Format on page 153 e Editing a Data Format on page 153 e Deleting a Data Format on page 153 Understanding the Data Format Page The DX8000 allows you to create a device data format for each ATM POS device You can assign a unique name to each device data format template The following figure shows the Data Format page Access the Data Format page from the Port Device page For information on accessing the Data Format
142. ated a pattern will repeat indefinitely until it is cleared another pattern is set or the on screen PTZ control is moved To activate a pattern 1 Onthe DX8000 keypad click a pattern number 1 to 4 on the keypad 2 Click Pattern Figure 24 Activating a Pattern CLEARING A PATTERN To clear a pattern 1 On the DX8000 keypad click to enter programming mode 2 Select a pattern number 1 to 4 on the keypad 3 Click Pattern 4 Click cir 5 Click Pattern again 6 Click Set again to exit programming mode g prog g Figure 25 Clearing a Pattern 50 C624M C 5 06 ACCESSING PROGRAMMING FEATURES OF REMOTE CAMERAS You can use the PTZ function to program features of remote cameras such as Pelco s Spectra or Esprit Only cameras that support remote programming through D P or Coaxitron protocols can use this feature The DX8000 allows you to navigate the remote camera menu system using any of the following e PTZ OSD Menu controls For information on using the PTZ OSD Menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 51 e Keypad controls For information on using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 52 e Keyboard keys For information on using the keyboard keys refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 45 The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to di
143. ature The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to program activate and clear patterns and access the programming features of remote cameras This section includes the following topics e Programming a Pattern on page 49 e Activating a Pattern on page 50 e Clearing a Pattern on page 50 e Accessing Programming Features of Remote Cameras on page 51 48 C624M C 5 06 PROGRAMMING A PATTERN This section describes how to program a pattern Certain PTZ devices such as Pelco s Spectra series domes will display an on screen message stating the amount of remaining memory available for pattern programming Start Programming a Pattern To program a pattern 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click 4 2 Drag a camera from the Site tree onto a view panel 3 On the DX8000 keypad click to enter programming mode 4 Using the PTZ keypad select a number for the pattern 1 to 4 5 Click Pattern 6 Move the camera through a series of movements using the on screen pan and tilt zoom and focus controls Figure 23 Programming a Pattern Stop Programming a Pattern To stop programming a pattern 1 On the DX8000 keypad click Pattern 2 Click Ed C624M C 5 06 49 ACTIVATING A PATTERN When activ
144. ay shift Creating a Favorites Folder To create a favorites folder 1 From the DX8000 menu bar click Organize Favorites The Organize Favorites dialog box opens RIL i x Favorites note EH Building 6 Day shift FB Building 6 Evening Shift Create Folder Rename Move to Folder Delete Folder amp File Note Figure 9 Organize Favorites Dialog Box 2 Click Create Folder A new folder is added to the favorites area 3 To name the folder do one of the following a If the new folder name is already selected type the name of the folder Or b If the new folder name is not selected 1 Click the new folder 2 Type the name of the folder The new folder is listed in the Favorites area of the Organize Favorites dialog box and in the Favorites menu 36 C624M C 5 06 Organizing Favorites in Folders To organize existing favorites into folders 1 Create a favorites folder For information about creating a favorites folder refer to Creating a Favorites Folder on page 36 2 From the DX8000 menu bar click Organize Favorites The Organize Favorites dialog box opens A list of the current favorites and folders is displayed in the favorites area LI x REGENCE FB Building 6 Day shift FB Building 6 Evening shift Create Folder Rename Move to Folder Delete Folder amp File Note Figure 10 Organize Favorites Dialog Box and List of Favorite
145. ble options Table Al Motion Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when the motion is detected Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact same time motion is detected 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after motion has been detected C624M C 5 06 Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output To configure an alarm relay output 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kil The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens The Schedule page is displayed 4 Click the Alarm tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an alarm a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Selecta relay timing value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Alarm Input Relay Output Activation Period 1 AlarmO1 Relay01 v 3 Seconds Alam ha a seconde NN Al y Disable AlarmO4 Alarm 5 No Link R Alamos Ma Ey y s Alarm08 No Link Y No Link y xl To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with Alarm in the linking setup te Figure 105 Linking Relays to Alarms The following table describes the available options Table AJ Alarm Activated Relay Settings Option Result
146. by importing its configuration file This sections describes how to use the import and export feature and includes the following topics e Exporting Current DVR Settings on page 182 e Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export on page 183 Exporting Current DVR Settings To save current DVR configuration settings 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click q The System page is displayed 3 Select the Export radio button 4 Select the check boxes of each configuration item you want to back up C624M C 5 06 5 Doone of the following a Tospecify the file name to export to enter drive path and file name information into the text box Settings file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions For example enter CADX80001 Jan 2004 config bak Or b To browse for a location 1 Click Browse The DX8000 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Enter a file name in the File name text box 3 Navigate to the drive and folder where you want to save the settings file 4 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 5 Click Save 6 Click Export Now Q Export Camera T Linking FF Schedule User Pot TT Backup TF Site Setup 05D Export Import Configuration LU Import Browse Export Now Monitor ATM POS Import Now Emergency Select All Figure 127
147. ccepts the selected remote camera OSD menu choice e Accesses menu option parameters For example if the cursor points to the Language option clicking Enter accesses the list of available languages Exit N A L2 Up and Down Navigate up and down the remote camera OSD menu or cycle through a list of options are parameters Buttons o Left and Right Perform no activity Buttons Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu The DX8000 allows you to navigate the remote camera menu system using any of the following e PTZ OSD Menu controls For information on using the PTZ OSD Menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 51 e Keypad controls For information on using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 52 e Keyboard keys For information on using the keyboard keys refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 45 The following procedure instructs you to use the PTZ OSD Menu control to navigate the remote camera programming menu To access a programming menu for a remote camera 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX 2 Drag a remote camera from the Site tree onto a view panel For certain camera models you can also select preset number 95 from the keypad to access remote setup mode 3 To access remote camera setup mode do one of the following e On the DX8000 keypad click from the keypad e Click cal
148. cess involves selecting a specific time range to be archived and the type of media to be used for the backup The primary difference between backing up and exporting video is that backup archives all channels for a specific time period while export only archives selected channels Following the directions below Power User and Administrators can set up and perform backups You must use the DX8000 Client application to view backed up data For more information about viewing backed up data refer to the Client Applications Manual This section describes how to back up data and includes the following topics e Accessing the Backup Configuration Page on page 165 e Adding a Backup Schedule on page 166 e Editing an Existing Backup Schedule on page 167 e Deleting an Existing Backup Schedule on page 168 e initiating an Instant Backup Schedule on page 168 e Mapping a Network Device on page 169 e Disconnecting from a Network Drive on page 169 e Selecting a Backup Media Device on page 170 e Viewing Backed Up Video on page 170 The following figure shows the Backup schedule page Backup schedule Backup start time Backup time Filter Target device Instant Backup r Running backup information waiting backup information Backup time Target device Enqueue time Priority Up Priority Down Delete 4 Cancel Apply Figure 118 Backup Configuration Screen 164 C624M
149. cessing the Emergency E Mail Notification Setup on page 201 To test e mail notification 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Select the My E mail Server Requires Authentication check box if it is not already selected 5 Enter your personal e mail address or the address of someone who can verify the receipt of the test e mail in the To text box 6 Enter DX8000 E mail Notification Test in the Subject text box 7 Enter the following server settings if necessary e Server address This address should be the same as the SMTP server address you entered above e Username e Password 8 Click Test E mail Notification Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification Enable Notification m Mail Group Full name Shipping Area DVR None al E mail Group E mail Address Jshindockdvi peleo com G To jdoeGipelco com Add to Group L None m ube Add to Group Im Department x 4 L ISm Department y I Delete Edit Manage Groups Subject DX8000 E mail Notification Test r Frequency mail SMTP smp domain1 pelco com 1 Minute X 70019 AN O My E mail Server Requires Authentication D Start 7 00 19 AM rz End 3 10 19 AM m Notification Items El Server address mto domain1 pelco com User nam
150. ch ATM POS transaction text data Pixel Search Allows users to search any 24 hour period of recorded video automatically for changes in screen pixels View Window Displays search video image thumbnails and pixel grid Site tree Facilitates top down hierarchical management of DX8000 resources such as servers cameras alarms and relays Event Index Panel Lists motion and alarm events over the 24 hour time period specified in the playback timeline Select All Check Box Enables playback for all visible view panels when selected If this check box is deselected only the selected channel will play This control is only available while using Index Search Td ayback Timeline Displays a 24 hour timeline marked with color coded video events Allows user to select a date and time for playback vu ayback Control Panel Provides buttons to control video playback Includes forward and reverse playback and still image Also provides controls for playback speed and volume t ayback Zoom Control Provides access to digital zoom features during playback AO 0000000900 Search Control Provides access to the index thumbnail POS and pixel search controls C624M C 5 06 DISPLAYING A DEINTERLACED IMAGE IN THE SEARCH MODE If you are searching for an image that is recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second the viewed image might move or tear The View menu s Deinterlaced Image opti
151. choose View gt Extended View For information on changing view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 The following PTZ operating guidelines must be observed e o program or clear presets preset tours and patterns the icon must be engaged e Toactivate presets tours and patterns the icon must be disengaged This section describes how to program activate and clear presets and includes the following topics e Programming a Preset on page 46 e Activating a Preset on page 47 e Clearing a Preset on page 48 PROGRAMMING A PRESET This section describes how to program a preset The following PTZ operating guidelines apply e licking the icon places DX8000 in PTZ programming mode e While in PTZ programming mode multiple presets can be programmed until the icon is pressed again To program a PTZ preset 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EG 2 Draga camera from the Site tree onto a view panel 3 Click Ed 4 Using the on screen PTZ controls and PTZ keypad move the camera to the desired position and adjust the zoom setting Figure 19 Creating a Preset C624M C 5 06 5 Using the PTZ keypad select a number for the new preset for example 1 6 Click to store the preset in the selected memory location 7 Repeat steps 4 6 for each preset you want to program 8 Click again to exit programming mode Figure 20
152. ck to display the Link page 3 Inthe Alarm Settings section do the following a In the Alarm Channel drop down box select the Alarm you want to configure b In the Alarm Name text box enter an optional new name for alarm Alarm names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters You can also rename sites cameras alarms and relays from the Site tree by clicking twice slowly on each object s name c Inthe Alarm Type section click the NO NC button to toggle the default output type for each alarm NO normally open or NC normally closed 4 Click Apply 112 C624M C 5 06 r Alarm Settings Alarm Channel JALARM 01 y Alam Name alamon i Alarm Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NO NO J NO J NO NO J NO J NO NO E 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J NO NO J NO J NO J NO J NO NO J NO Figure 75 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Alarm Settings Section LINKING RELAY OUTPUTS TO EXTERNAL EVENTS This section describes how to link relay outputs to external events such as motion alarm ATM POS and video loss events This section includes the following topics e Linking Relay Outputs to Motion Events on page 113 e Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Events on page 114 e Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events on page 114 e Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events on page 115 To access the Event Relay Link Settings page 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kill The Setup dia
153. click Apply The selected time period is deleted e To cancel the change click Cancel The deleted recording times are restored Record Mode KE Normal Wil Motion Alarm FP ATM POS 0 12 3 456 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Figure 91 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes CREATING YEARLY RECORDING SCHEDULES The DX8000 allows you create and save various recording schedules This section describes how to create yearly recording schedules and includes the following sections e Creating a Yearly Recording Schedule on page 126 e Scheduling Individual Days Using the Year View on page 127 e Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day on page 127 Creating a Yearly Recording Schedule Year View allows a user to customize recording schedules for individual days Year View displays daily recording schedules in a calendar format The calendar displays one year s worth of daily recording schedules The scheduling period begins in the current month e Days circled in red have been assigned weekday weekend or everyday recording schedules e Days circled in blue have been assigned a custom recording schedule e Days without circles denote that no recording has been scheduled for that day C624M C 5 06 Scheduling Individual Days Using the Year View To schedule individual days using the Year View 1 From the DX8000 toolbar click Y
154. cording schedule profile123 scheduled modes123 124 alarm ATM POS motion normal recording modes124 recording schedule122 relays Event Relay Link Settings page accessing113 linked relay output removing from a camera34 removing from an alarm input34 manually turning On and Off32 multiple relays linking to one camera33 relay output alarm event linking t033 114 ATM POS event linking to114 222 motion event linking to113 number supported 11 video loss event linking to115 setting up advanced relay output138 basic operating properties112 creating custom name for112 relay output type selecting112 relay selecting112 single relay linking to multiple cameras33 remote camera menu system navigating using Keypad controls51 52 PC keyboard keys51 52 PTZ OSD menu control51 PTZ OSD menu controls51 52 programming features accessingb1 protocol supportb1 remote site accessing features of17 activating181 active remote cameras finding180 connecting to17 deleting181 DHCP IP addressed adding179 disconnecting from17 editing181 logging into17 logging out of18 modifying181 overview177 static IP addressed adding177 remote sites overview 77 resolution resolution value setting for recording136 screen23 RS 232148 RS 422 RS 4851 48 150 S schedule accessing122 all record modes clearing schedule126 clearing a recording schedule125 copying attributes127 130 custom settings123 deleting a schedule132 editing a
155. ct Enable Disabling Instant Recording To disable the Instant Recording mode 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click It The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C 3 In the Camera Settings Panel from the Instant Recording drop down box select Disable ADDING INSTANT RECORDING TO OSD To add the Instant Recording icon to the OSD From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Instant Recording The Instant Record icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the view pane STARTING AND STOPPING INSTANT RECORDING The Instant Recording mode must first be enabled from the Schedule page and the Instant Recording icon must be visible in the lower right corner of the view pane For more information on DX8000 instant recording refer to nstant Recording on page 39 For information on OSD refer to Live View On Screen Display OSD on page 38 The following figure shows the Record and Instant Record icons Figure 14 Activating Instant Recording C624M C 5 06 The following table describes the instant recording indicators Table O Instant Recording Indicators Item Icon Description 1 REC Indicates camera recording mode and status A blinking REC indicator signifies event recording e Green indicates normal recording e Blue indicates motion recording e Red indicates alarm recording e Yellow indicates ATM POS recording o Instant Recording Starts stops instant r
156. cters long and can contain spaces and special characters For example Building 1 DVR 5 Enter the IP address of the remote site C624M C 5 06 177 178 6 If necessary do the following a Entera new base port number 9002 is the default Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change port numbers from their default values Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8000 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical b Enter a new upgrade port number 9003 is the default c Entera new information port number 9003 is the default d Click Add The site appears in the Site IP list on the right Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each additional site you want to add Up to 50 remote sites can be added to the site list Click Apply Once a remote site has been set up its name appears in the Site tree It may take up to five minutes to initially connect to the site Once a connection has been established cameras from the remote site can be dragged onto the main screen view panels r Site information 1 r Site IP list a ras Fun ss lab 172 17 0 158 6a IP Address 172 AE 0 DX8000 Base Port p B Upgrade Port 3003 Bc 1 Information Port 9005 r Search DX8000 I Server on NAT Add Group Edit Delete r Camera Selection Setting Camera 1 M Camera 2 Y Camera 3 V Camera
157. d Link Settings Alarm Channel ame Alarm Name Alamo l Linked Camera Channel camerao o IS aa Linked Camera Pattern No jt in use y Figure 85 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events 119 120 Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events To link an ATM POS input to a camera so that the detected ATM POS event results in a repositioning of that camera 1 Le On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the ATM POS Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS Address drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to an ATM POS input detected by the source ATM POS device To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do the one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to an ATM POS input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset radio button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 for the camera to move to e To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to ATM POS input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked
158. d Recovery dialog box c Anyadditional information requested by Pelco Product Support 3 Enter the new password you obtained from Pelco Product Support in the field provided 4 Click OK C624M C 5 06 215 216 C624M C 5 06 Index A access levels Administrator16 logging into DX800016 logging out of DX800016 user16 accounts access levels16 access levels definition of173 Administrator16 built in user accounts173 camera security access174 Guest16 activating remote sites181 active remote cameras locating180 address DHCP144 static P144 administrator accessing the setup mode102 setup options102 alarm event emergency notification124 recording mode setting up124 alarm inputs linking a single alarm input to multiple cameras33 linking multiple alarms to one camera33 removing a linked alarm input from a camera34 setting up alarm input selecting112 alarm output type selecting112 basic operating properties112 creating custom name for112 supported 11 area viewing pane20 26 panel20 26 ATM POS communications connection running diagnostics159 connection verifying159 viewing ATM POS data160 ATM POS device data format assigning to an ATM POS device154 creating153 deleting153 editing153 overview151 Data Format page overview151 device filter custom153 C624M C 5 06 dynamic link library DLL files163 multi mode150 protocols installing163 updating163 single mode150 ATM PO
159. de Features Control Action Joystick Controls the camera s PTZ operation Number PRESET short Moves camera to the programmed preset position Number PRESET long Programs the current camera position to the desired preset number Number PATTERN long Starts the pattern record mode ACK Stops the pattern record mode Number PATTERN Runs the desired pattern Numbers AUX ON AUX OFF Turns the specified auxiliary output on or off Number MON Assigns the selected camera to the desired view pane The active view pane is highlighted 162 C624M C 5 06 KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features The following table describes the KBD300A Shift Mode operational features Table AV KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features Control Action Joystick Activity within the DX8000 Site tree e Up Down direction Moves the cursor vertically through each element in the Site tree An element is a DX8000 site camera within each DX8000 site or alam ATM POS or relay within each DX8000 site If an element is expanded the joystick moves the cursor vertically through the objects of that element e Left Right direction Right Expands an element to display objects contained under the element Left Collapses an element and hides its objects Select a camera unit at the tree Number CAM Expands the specified DX8000 Site tree If there are two sites 1 CAM expands DX800
160. deo recorder The DX8000 Series digital video recorder is a high performance PC based digital video recorder It is an easy to operate digital video recorder DVR client application system The DX8000 features multi event recording supporting continuous motion detection alarm ATM POS and scheduled recording simultaneously Models range from an eight channel single 80 GB hard disk drive HDD unit to a sixteen channel unit with up to 1 TB of storage DX8000 software runs on two platforms e he DX8000 DVR server software runs on the DX8000 Series DVR e The DX8000 Client Application software runs on a personal computer PC and allows you to log in to and operate the DX8000 DVR server system from your local PC Fully implemented networking capabilities allow remote administration playback and export using the accompanying client application Live viewing is supported on a variety of client platforms including Internet browsers and pocket PC compatible hand held devices Versatile high speed search operations include time and date event list thumbnail and intelligent pixel searching Extensive scheduling features allow customizing of weekday weekend and special event recording The DX8000 provides a graphical user interface GUI allowing you quick and efficient access to all setup and operations functions Scheduled or manual backup can be performed using a number of optical external and mapped network drive options An online Help s
161. deo sequence as a standard Windows video format ASF Saves video sequence as a standard Windows media file Native Saves video sequence using DX8000 s proprietary compression format Native format provides increased compression and smaller file sizes BMP Saves a still image file in standard Windows bitmap format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved JPEG Saves a still image file in JPEG format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved TIFF Saves a still image file in TIF format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved To select the export format From the Export Video dialog box select the radio button of the file format you want to export C624M C 5 06 EXPORTING A SEQUENCE OF STILL IMAGES Still image formats export the first frame of a bookmarked region and then a single frame for each time interval until the number of images specified has been exported For example consider exporting a six hour bookmarked region of video with an image count of 100 and a time interval of 3 seconds The resulting export will include the first frame of the bookmarked region followed by 99 additional images taken at 3 second intervals The first exported image will be the first frame of the bookmarked region and the last image will be the frame taken at 300 seconds into the bookmarked region To export a sequence of still images 1 Selecta still image format Options are BMP JPEG and TIF 2 Select the nu
162. des the following topics e Accessing the Schedule on page 122 e Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 124 e Creating Yearly Recording Schedules on page 126 e Creating Monthly or Multiple Day Recording Schedules on page 128 e Creating Single Day Schedules on page 129 e Editing Schedules on page 131 e Working with Custom Camera Settings on page 133 e Configuring the Frame Rate on page 135 e Setting Up Advanced Relay Output on page 138 ACCESSING THE SCHEDULE To access the scheduling features of the DX8000 1 From the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Schedule page is displayed The following figure shows the Schedule page Morth View Year Vien Al days X Lm jose ve ov 9 July 2005 ww BAREN mi 25 2005 a Ready p FTTTTTTTTTITTTTTTTTTTTMII Admin Tam toed 551015 94 7 9M Figure 88 Schedule Page C624M C 5 06 The following table describes the parts of the Schedule page Table AD Parts of the Schedule Page Item Part Description Schedule Type Drop down Box Selects the type of schedule Options are as follows e All days Seven days a week e Weekdays Monday through Friday with the exception of any day assigned in Custom mode e Weekends Saturday and Sunday with the exception of any day assigned in Custom mode e Custom Mode Any day such as a holiday Recording Sch
163. dministrators can create new user accounts and modify existing users locally on the DX8000 server or remotely from the DX8000 Client Application User names and passwords have the following requirements e User names can be between 4 and 20 alphanumeric characters in length e U ser passwords can be between 4 and 10 alphanumeric characters in length e User names cannot contain spaces and special characters e User names and passwords are case sensitive To add a new user 1 0 n the DX8000 toolbar c ick YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click a The User page is displayed 3 Click Add The Add New User dialog box opens 4 D 8 b C 0 the following Enter a login name Enter the user s full or the user name Enter a brief description for the user For example enter Building 6 Security Guard characters Enter a password for the user Passwords must be between 4 and 10 characters in length and cannot contain spaces and special Re enter the same password to confirm its validity C624M C 5 06 5 Click Next The user access level options for the New User dialog box are displayed 6 Select the user s access level Restricted Standard or Power 7 Click Finish 8 Click Apply x Enter the basic information for the new user User name jdoe Full name fined 19 Description Front desk security Type and confirm a password f
164. e shipdockdvr Password y G Test E mail Notification Event Selected Channels O Motion Dalam LI Video Loss I D Cancel Apply Figure 140 E Mail Test C624M C 5 06 SETTING UP THE TIME PERIOD The DX8000 can be configured to send e mail notifications on a periodic basis such as once every ten minutes This sections describes how to set up the time period and includes the following topics Configuring E Mail Notification Frequency on page 204 Setting the Time of Day on page 204 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Motion Events on page 205 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Alarm Events on page 205 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Video Loss Events on page 206 Configuring E Mail Notification Frequency Depending on the volume of motion alarm or video loss events that are detected by the DX8000 the number of e mail notifications can be far too many to manage effectively To keep the number of e mails sent by the DX8000 at a manageable level the e mail notification frequency can be adjusted When events have been detected e mail notifications can be sent out in intervals from once per minute up to once every six hours If no events have been detected during the specified frequency interval no notification will be sent Each e mail notification will include information about the first event detected during the interval the last
165. e Click Si The Export Video dialog box opens 3 Click Map NetDrv The Map Network Drive dialog box opens asking for a drive letter and path 4 n the Drive drop down box select a drive letter that is not being used 5 Type the path in the Folder drop down box NP address of serverMolder name is an example 6 Optional Click the Reconnect at logon box if you do not want the mapped drive to remain connected each time you logon 7 Click Finish The newly mapped drive is added as a remote drive and is displayed in the Device area The mapped drive can now be accessed just like a local drive 94 C624M C 5 06 Export Video x r Device r Time Range 2 Optical disk drives Ei CD R RW DL 10142004 06 00 00 10 14 2004 06 30 00 Front Entrance O TEAC CD WS52E O2 10 14 2004 090000 10 14 2004 10 00 00 North Entrance Ei DVD R RW O3 103442004 11 30 18 10442004 1200 18 EastEntrance E Not installed O4 10142004 140018 10442004 150018 South Entrance hem ei O5 10142004 170018 10442004 18 00 18 West Entrance Q Na ais i Os 10142004 20 0018 1044 2004 22 00 18 Lobby E E Removal drive O i Delete Item File Name Apply Export Format C aM C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TF Refresh Ereate folder VV Audio Record Iv Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y Map NetDrv Disconnect NetDrv alc N Export Cancel Figure 63 Export Video D
166. e 17 Gornnecting toa Remote SHE iu ssec een ere pr ii Ra Regis 17 Disconnecting from a Remote Site iocos e da Med de E bep Da it 17 LOQGINGIN toa REMOTE SIC sua us aero RERO gr Enea men sem EYES DR dain uae da VERG E anes 17 logging Outiof a Remote SIEG sete m oro e pb tede pr EE UR D RE D BR a E equiti ted 18 Understanding the DX8000 Application Window sssssssssssssssssss ses I RH e e n 19 Description of the DX8000 Main Window ssssssssssss IRR e 19 DX8000 Menu Bar 22 A A MILI LUE A et a ee ML 22 enm A A aa 22 A O RA 23 Export Meniko ii T 24 Favorite WOMU sce a cout cat ota tate id ten PPM EM Aa Bue t M eae el ND 24 aT CPC 24 PASO n Aner 25 Displaying the DX8000 Window from a Page oooooooooooo RR M M le 26 Description of Operating Modes n n n ununun e e e le 26 Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views 20 0 0 0 000 c ccc eect e 26 Understanding View Panes and Panels 2 0 0 0 0c ccc ee eee deed e e n 26 Working with View Pane and Panel 26 GConfigulirig View Panels 3 ceu rx eret EVA RR IER Y Ds E Chute ew udo emi Fata is 27 Navigating View Panels eet e pec REVEAL et ende Se isa edd 27 Navigating Between View Panels 2 22 usse ac se be o kc s 27 Expanding and Collapsing View Pane iiissssssssssssssssssssss I e e re 29 Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels 200 0000 cece cece II e 29 Automatically Cycling Through View Windows s
167. e Ctrl Alt Del key combination 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 In the Setup Ctrl Alt Del key combination section click the Enable Ctrl Alt Del key combination selection check box 4 Click Apply 5 Reboot the DX8000 Using Ctrl Alt Del You must enable the Ctrl Alt Del key combination and verify your actual keyboard mapping In some cases the DX8000 keyboard is remapped and the actual Ctrl Alt and Delete key function is assigned to other keys Ctrl Alt Del allows you to access the Windows Task Manager dialog box from within the DX8000 shell When you exit the Windows environment you are returned to the DX8000 shell In this case you do not have to log back into the DX8000 To access the Windows Task Manager dialog box 1 Press the assigned keyboard keys that implement the Ctrl Alt Del function The Windows Security dialog box opens 2 In the Windows Security dialog box click Task Manager The Windows Task Manager window opens To return to the DX8000 shell without rebooting the DX8000 exit the Windows Task Manager dialog box C624M C 5 06 189 190 SETTING UP AUTO REBOOT The DX8000 allows you to select the day and time for the DX8000 server to perform an automatic reboot If there are mapped network drives the Windows feature requires that the password be entered at the Enter Network Password dialog box In this
168. e Modifying an E Mail Group Name on page 207 e Deleting an E Mail Group on page 207 Adding Members to an E Mail Group on page 207 Deleting Members from an E Mail Group on page 208 Modifying E Mail Group Member Attributes on page 209 Adding an E Mail Notification Group To add an e mail notification group 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b Click Add Group The Manage Groups dialog box opens c Enter the name of the group Group names can be up to 32 characters in length and can include spaces but not special characters 5 Click OK 6 Click Close 7 Click Apply C624M C 5 06 Modifying an E Mail Group Name To modify a group name 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following E a ick Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b In the Group Name table select a group C Click Edit Group The Manage Groups dialog box opens d Editthe existing name or enter a new name for the group Click OK Click Close Click Apply Deleting an E Mail
169. e Site on page 181 ADDING A REMOTE SITE Up to 100 DX8000 DVR server sites can be added to the local server s site list Up to four remote DVR sites can be accessed from a single DX8000 a total of five sites including the local DVR can be active on a single network segment Up to 16 cameras can be viewed and managed for each remote site 32 of which can be simultaneously assigned to view panels Once a site has been added to the site list it can be managed and viewed just as the local DVR The following steps allow a user with Power User access and higher to configure access to remote DVRs Once a remote site has been added all viewing searching and setup functions of that site can be accessed from the local DX8000 To access the features of a remote site users must possess a valid user account with the appropriate access rights for that site This section describes how to add a site with a static IP or dynamic IP address and includes the following topics e Adding a Site with a Static IP Address on page 177 e Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address on page 179 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address To add a remote DVR site to the site when you know the IP address of the site 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click E 3 Select the Manual radio button if it is not already selected 4 Entera site name for the remote DVR Site names can be up to 32 chara
170. e day of the week In this case each day represents an individual backup schedule for that specific day and time constraints you configure 2 Under the Backup Start Time click the Time drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to start 3 Under the Backup Time Range click the Day drop down boxes Select the day you want the backup schedule to start and the day you want the backup schedule to stop 4 Under the Backup Time Range click the Time drop down boxes Select the time of day you want the backup schedule to start and the time you want the backup schedule to stop 5 Inthe Channel Record Type section select the channel record type as follows 1 Click the All or Clear button to select or clear all of the channels at once or click channel 1 16 individually to select or deselect a channel 2 Click the Categories drop down box to select the type of recording The backup schedule includes only the type of recording that you have specified C624M C 5 06 6 Optional In the Device Selection section to map a network drive for backup do one of the following a or b Click the Map a network drive button to map a network drive The Windows Map Network Drive dialog box opens For more information about mapping a network drive refer to Mapping a Network Device on page 169 1 Specify the drive letter for the connection and the folder that you want to connect to 2 Click Finish The
171. e on page 29 e Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels on page 29 e Automatically Cycling Through View Windows on page 29 Navigating Between View Panels The DX8000 allows you to monitor up to 36 channels each channel is assigned to 1 pane within the view panel If the 36 division display format is selected all 36 panes occupy one panel However for single 4 division 9 division 16 division and 25 division display formats the DX8000 displays the panes in multiple panels In this case to view all of the panes you must cycle through multiple panels to display hidden panels e Channel As pertains to video one DX8000 camera port input The term channel is sometimes used interchangeably with camera e Camera One external video device such as a Spectra III that provides input video to the DX8000 DVR For example if you select the single division display format 1 channel video pane fills the entire panel C624M C 5 06 27 28 e he pane and panel represent the same amount of viewing area e Inthis case there will be an additional 31 hidden panels 1 pane 1 panel available to cycle through Similarly if you select the 4 division display format e Four panes one camera channel per pane are displayed in the panel e Inthis case 7 hidden panels four cameras channels per panel which equals 4 x 7 28 panels remain to be displayed The following figure shows how the DX8000 cycles through view panels dependi
172. e up sequence instances Multiple sequence instances can be combined into a sequence list The resulting list will sequentially display each instance on an external monitor in a continuous loop The sequence will continue uninterrupted until an alarm or motion event overrides the cycle The manual camera mapping feature has the following stipulations e Eight channel DVRs offer only the 1x1 2x2 and 3x3 view panel options e Ifyou select more than one screen division each camera channel will cycle through each screen before the next panel division is presented This section describes how to set up manual camera mapping and includes the following topics e Creating Monitor Sequence Instances on page 193 e loading an Existing Sequence List on page 194 e Modifying a Sequence Instance in the List on page 195 e Deleting a Sequence Instance from the List on page 196 e Appending an Existing Sequence List on page 197 C624M C 5 06 Creating Monitor Sequence Instances To add a sequence instance to the sequence list C624M C 5 06 1 Ze On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card is installed The External Output page is displayed In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a Select the Manual Camera Mapping Mode radio button if it is not already selected b Select one of the screen division options c Drag came
173. e when the ATM POS event occurs Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact same time the ATM POS event occurs 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the ATM POS event occurs C624M C 5 06 141 Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output To configure an advanced video loss activated relay output 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the Video Loss tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an alarm a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Selecta relay timing value from the Activation Period drop down box Configure Relays RIE n e9 etl Mation Alarm ATM POS Video Loss Camera01 Relay 04 Y Follow Event ull Motion Input Relay Output Activation Period Camera02 Camera03 CameraD4 No Link Camera05 No Link v No Link Camera0l6 No Link Y No Link CameraD No Link Y No Link Camera08 No Link y No Link To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with Video Loss in the linking setup te Figure 107 Linking Relays to Video Loss The following table describes the available options Table AL Video Loss Activated Relay Settings Option Res
174. ecial length of time Figure 115 Assigning an Exception to an ATM POS Device Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection To verify that the ATM POS connection is working correctly C624M C 5 06 il 2 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Diagnostics tab In the ATM POS Information section select the ATM POS device in the Device ID drop down box 159 5 Dothe following a Verify that transaction data is displayed in the ATM POS Raw Data View area b Verify that transaction data as interpreted by the DX8000 is displayed in the Result Box General Settings Data Format Test to Screen Advanced Diagnostics r ATM POS Information ATM POS Raw Data View m com WELCOME a made Single Mode CHOCOLATE MILK 8 OZ 0 49 e IROASTED NUTS 1 79 Device ID arw Pos t IBACON PREMIUM 3 49 ICHIPS 1 99 ATM POS Name ATM POSO1 APPLE 0 59 ISUB TOTAL 8 35 Protocol POS GENERAL j TAX 0 67 Data Format ER 650 TOTAL 9 02 The Diagnostics Result Box contains the parsed 7 29 2005 9 13 22 0042 information recevied fram the ATM POS device ITHANK YOU E zi All Clear Result Box START TRANSACTION DVR DATE Y M D 2005 07 23 DYA TIME H M S 16 14 02 ADD ITEM Bal ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM AD
175. ecording if enabled Changes from silver to blue to indicate that instant recording is activated This section describes how to start and stop instant recording and includes the following topics e Starting Instant Recording on page 41 e Stopping Instant Recording on page 41 Starting Instant Recording To start instant recording Double click the Instant Recording icon located in the lower right corner of the view pane e The Instant Recording icon changes from silver to blue indicating that instant recording is activated e f video recording is enabled verify that REC is highlighted white If video recording is not enabled REC is not displayed Stopping Instant Recording To deactivate instant recording In the view pane double click the Instant Recording icon OPERATING THE ON SCREEN PAN TILT AND ZOOM PTZ CONTROLS Users with Standard User access and higher may operate pan tilt and zoom lens functions of cameras that support such features PTZ functions can be controlled on screen in Live mode using the mouse PTZ control is available only for cameras that support PTZ functions using Pelco s P D or Coaxitron protocols For more information about configuring PTZ ports refer to Setting Up COM1 and COM2 Port Properties on page 149 In addition the PTZ option must be enabled and a protocol must be assigned to the camera channel For more information refer to Camera Setup on page 105 This section de
176. ed to run e Filter The selected channels to be backed up e Target device The selected backup media device e Enqueue time The system s estimated time that the backup schedule will run Waiting backup Allows you to do the following e Priority Up Allows you to move the selected backup schedule to a higher place in the list e Priority Down Allows you to move the selected backup schedule to a lower place in the list e Delete Allows you to delete the selected backup schedule e Running backup information Lists the backup schedules that are currently running ACCESSING THE BACKUP CONFIGURATION PAGE For information on the Backup schedule page refer to Data Backup Setup on page 164 To access the Backup page 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click amp C624M C 5 06 165 166 ADDING A BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8000 allows you to configure the start time and time range for backing up data The backup schedule can be configured to run on a daily basis at a set time and for a specified time range that applies to every day Or you can set up the backup schedule s to run at selected days of the week In this case selecting a weekly backup schedule allows you to customize the start time and time range for each selected day of the week The start date and time cannot be set later than the end date and time To define the time ra
177. edule Profile Allows you to do the following e Select and apply an existing schedule profile e Create and save a new profile e Change an existing profile Delete an existing profile Calendar Displays current schedule profile in accordance with the schedule type selected All Days Weekdays Weekends or Custom Mode Start and End Date Markers Sets the start and end dates for a custom schedule Record Mode Selects a recording mode to be applied to a camera Options are as follows e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS Channel Scheduling Panel Allows the assignment of recording modes across individual camera channels over a 24 hour period Camera Settings Panel Allows custom settings to be applied to individual cameras for each recording mode Apply Saves current schedule Frame Rate Configuration Allows configuration of channel resolution and frame rates Configure Relays Allows configuration of relays that have been linked to cameras and alarms o0 0000 Instant Recording Enables or disables selection of instant recording from the View menu C624M C 5 06 123 124 SETTING UP THE CAMERA RECORDING MODE The DX8000 allows you to schedule each camera to record in a single or multiple modes across a 24 hour timeline Users with Power User access or higher can schedule video recording for one or more cameras Use the Record Mode section ne
178. elected Click Apply Verify that you can hear live audio On the DX8000 toolbar click EX Drag a camera configured to record live audio from the Site tree onto a view pane Verify that you can hear live audio 109 110 CONFIGURING VIDEO LOSS DETECTION You can configure the DX8000 to monitor each camera for the following events Loss of synchronization This event occurs if the data cable between the camera and DX8000 is disconnected cable is cut or unplugged or the camera looses power Low level of video This event occurs if the DX8000 detects a low level of video signal from the camera The available light source for the camera indoor outdoor lightly is greatly diminished The DX8000 data cable is disconnected You can adjust the operation time from 0 00 to 23 59 For example if the start time is 6 00 and the end time is 18 00 a low video level event from 18 01 to 5 59 will not be detected The low video level detection time option is only available when the low level of video option is selected The DX8000 allows you to select the loss of synchronization and low level of video option independently The PTZ camera and multiple relay output can be mapped to a video loss event Multiple cameras can be configured to record in response to a video loss event The DX8000 can be configured to use emergency agent notification In this case the last available video image when the event occurred is sent to the desig
179. ents orc Lp aot ete eme ete ur ede oe ad rude e dte 113 Linking Relay Q tputs t Motion Events gen get e REIN bt Wie cae HO UT 113 Linking Relay Outputs to AlarmEVerits comia neta tn ete NUS hock BOAT Oak bU EE UD SD BRE ds d 114 Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events ii icem lu herve cR pre cs pite Re ul bey RP TR dd Lyr Quad 114 Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events iiiisiisisissssssssssssssse IIR e 115 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to External Events 0 0 00 00 cece cece e 15 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Motion Events 0 00 0000 ccc cece cece e 16 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events 0 00 0 0 e cece cece eect rr 16 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events 00 000 c cece cece cnt n eens 17 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events 2 2 2 0 000 e cece sess 17 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to External Events 2 0 0 0c RR 18 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Motion Events 0 0 00 c cece cence eee n 18 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events 0 0 00 Ren 19 Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events n nannan nannu nnne eeoa 20 Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events 0 00 IRR 21 A eese deem MEUM een Gest cue ea ancl pale Ate oss eto habei De tute ri she TAN 122 Accessing ihe Schedules 2t reir biqec hd etre d d edad eosque hd od Sd ibo ded euius 122 Setting Up the C
180. eration features in the Site tree from the keyboard This section describes the KBD300A Shift mode features functions The Shift mode is effective within the DX8000 Site tree You can move the cursor to select elements within the Site tree expand collapse elements and select the display division For detailed information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about configuring DX8000 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 161 The following table describes the KBD300A Shift mode operational features specific to the DX8000 server Table S KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features Keyboard Control Action Joystick Activity within the DX8000 Site tree e Up down direction Moves the cursor vertically through each element in the Site tree An element is a DX8000 site camera within each DX8000 site or Alarm ATM POS and relay within each DX8000 site If an element is expanded the joystick moves the cursor vertically through the objects of that element e Left right direction Right Expands an element to display objects contained under the element Left Collapses an element and hides its objects Select a camera unit at the tree Number CAM Expands the Site tree and selects the first camera in each DX8000 site For example if there are two sites with one named DX8000 site 1 and the othe
181. es Windows is configured by default to recognize Daylight Saving and Standard Time changes automatically When the DX8000 encounters a time change from Daylight to Standard time it will record data for the transition time period twice For example when the system clock is set back one hour from 2 00 AM to 1 00 AM there will appear two periods on the playback timeline that represent the transition hour C624M C 5 06 SELECTING THE VIDEO FORMAT To select the appropriate video signal format for your location 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The System page is displayed 3 In the Video Format section click NTSC or PAL to select the format 4 Click Apply WORKING WITH CTRL ALT DEL FUNCTION This section describes how to use the DX8000 Ctrl Alt Del key combination and includes the following topics e Enabling Ctrl Alt Del on page 189 e Using Ctrl Alt Del on page 189 Enabling Ctrl Alt Del Enabling the Ctrl Alt Del key combination allows you to open the Windows Task Manager dialog box to perform Windows system administration tasks To complete the procedure you must be logged on to the DX8000 as an administrator or a member of the administrators group on a computer that is part of a network domain The DX8000 keyboard is remapped To see which keys replace the Ctrl and Alt keys refer to the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide To enable th
182. es the following topics e Adding a Camera View to Favorites on page 35 e Organizing Favorites in Folders on page 36 ADDING A CAMERA VIEW TO FAVORITES You can create multiple camera views to monitor various site locations For example you could create a folder named Day Shift for displaying camera views during normal working hours and Night Shift for displaying various camera views after work and during the night hours For information about organizing favorites into folders refer to Organizing Favorites in Folders on page 36 To add a camera view to favorites 1 From the DX8000 menu bar click Add to Favorites The Add to Favorites dialog box opens CI x e Cancel Name Create In gt gt Figure 7 Add to Favorites Dialog Box C624M C 5 06 35 2 Enter the camera view name in the Name text box 3 Click OK The camera view is added to the favorites and the Add to Favorites dialog box closes 4 To view the new entry from the DX8000 menu bar click Favorites The new entry appears in the Favorites list File Edit View Export Favorite Help Add to Favorites Organize Favorites qu Building 6 Day Shift Figure 8 Favorites Menu List ORGANIZING FAVORITES IN FOLDERS As your list of favorites grows you can keep them organized by creating folders You can organize your camera views by site name user name and so forth For example you could create a folder named Day Shift for displaying camera views for the d
183. etting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 124 for instructions Click Save Click Apply Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen 129 Q View Year View lt Back August 2005 Next gt E Ea amp New Save _ Delete Apply 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Once Per Month C Once Per Year 14 15 Ee 17 18 18 20 Start 08 2005 d End 08 2005 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Record Mode JE Normal ll Motion Wi Alarm arM P0S Figure 95 Month View Page Single Day Schedule Copying and Applying Schedule Attributes To copy the schedule attributes of one day and apply them to a different day 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Right click the calendar day you want to copy 4 Select Copy from the quick menu Revert to daily schedule Figure 96 Month View Calendar Quick Menu 5 Right click on the calendar day to which you want to apply the copied schedule attributes 6 Select Paste from the quick menu 7 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen To change a custom schedule day to a regular schedule day right click and select Revert to daily schedule from the quick menu 130 C624M C 5 06 EDITING SCHEDULES This section describes how to edit a schedule to change its profile
184. etup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Inthe Notification Items section do the following a Click the Motion check box b Click once in the Selected Channels field to the right of the word Motion The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Do one of the following e Click the check box of each channel you want to monitor for motion detection events e lick Select All to monitor all channels for motion detection e Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Alarm Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever an alarm input is activated To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to whenever an alarm input is activated 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Notification Items section do the following a Click the Alarm check box b Click once in the Selected Channels field to the right of the word Alarm The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Doone of the following e Click the check box of each channel you want to monitor for alarm detection events e Click Select All to monitor all channels for alarm detection e lick Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK
185. evel of Video Detection Operation Time section set the end time Click Apply Y Low level of video s Level of Video Detection Operation Time Start Time 00 00 End Time 22 53 Video Loss Detection Video Loss IV Loss of synchronization 3 Figure 73 Video Loss Detection C624M C 5 06 APPLYING SETTINGS TO ALL CAMERAS If you want to keep the changes you made to options and parameters on the Camera page you must click Apply If you attempt to leave the Camera page the system will display a message box prompting you to apply not apply or cancel the changes To apply camera configuration options to all attached cameras 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Perform the camera configuration 3 In the Apply to All Cameras section select the check boxes for Protocol Camera Security Picture Adjustment Motion Detection Audio Settings and Video Loss that you want to apply to all cameras 4 Click Apply to All Cameras 5 Click Apply LINK SETUP This section describes how to use the Link page to set up the following e Relay and alarm settings Event relay link settings Event recording link settings e Event PTZ link settings This section includes the following topics e Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings on page 111 e Linking Relay Outputs to External Events on page 113 e Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to External Events on
186. for transmission of video audio and interface data 9003 Yes Software upgrades 9004 Yes Emergency agent notifications 9005 No Information port 13900 No Ping port Access the Network page to set up the TCP IP DHCP and bandwidth throttle options For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 Consult your network administrator before assigning or changing port numbers Make sure that the ports are not blocked internally but are protected from external threats by a firewall Client and server ports must be identical To configure the base port and software upgrade port 1 If necessary in the DX8000 Base Port box enter a new base port number 9002 is the default 2 If necessary in the Software Upgrade Port box enter a new software upgrade port 9003 is the default 3 If necessary in the Information Port box enter a new information port 9005 is the default 4 To set the network bandwidth throttle to limit the amount of network resources allocated to client connections drag the network bandwidth throttle slider to the desired value Client bandwidth can be adjusted from a minimum of 256 Kbps to a maximum of 10 Mbps in increments of 256 Kbps 5 Click Apply C624M C 5 06 145 146 ACCESSING NETWORK INFORMATION Access the Network page to view DX8000 network settings For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page
187. from the Camera Channel drop down box This camera will be the motion source b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to motion detected by the source camera To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do the one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to motion detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset radio button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 for the camera to move to e Toforce a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to motion detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern radio button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Motion Detection Link Settings Camera Channel CAMERAD1 Camera Name Camera 1 Click Apply Linked PTZ Setting Linked Camera Preset PRESETO1 y Linked Camera Channel cameraor gt C Linked Camera Pattem Not in use y Figure 84 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Motion Events C624M C 5 06 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events To
188. g Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to an ATM POS event 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 n the ATM POS Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS address drop down box b Click the button of each camera you want to begin recording in response to an ATM POS event 5 Click Apply ATM POS Address Jarw Posoi ATM POS Name farmaPoso1 E Record Link Settings Enable Record Live on Source ATM POS E vent cl C2 C4 ES C6 Cc C8 cs C3 cg cio Cii C12 C13 cl c15 C16 Figure 82 Event Recording Link Settings ATM POS Record Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to a video loss event 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 In the Video Loss Record Link Settings section do the following a Select a camera from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b Click the button of each camera you want to begin recording in response to a video loss event 5 Click Apply Video
189. g Madera C eco rm seu ean b Da ec pete m lee c D EAE Ee Le 101 Printing Images in the Deiriterlaced Mode 52 neges tr Auk RbeccicWsseESDIe R Bleunke eb bd iofic dene 01 Setting Up the DO td lar ia 102 Accessing the Setup MIE E Sa ods A A eee 02 Understanding the Setup Dialog BOX 0 A A Mallet d date A a delete 03 Camera Setup eg e Loser an it ra tds dae lO Aids 105 Basic CMT aii het E MEDIE E A A eee bie deus 05 Motion DE e Leda iens dat teu 07 AU ISC ae ae a a date de 108 listening tox Ive AUdlO 2 825 sentes ed dd e la as Mi e ad ad ld LE ds ea Ds 09 Listening to Live Audio at a Local Server oooooooocococooco corr 109 Listening to Live Audio from a Remote DX8000 System n n n nunnu nunnana nanara rererere 109 Configuring Video Loss Detection iiiiiiisisssssssssssssssese nnn e e le 110 Applyirig Settings to all Game as s cack acetone rte esp Y ERR Rua ERE E RED utes 111 LINK Setup sco ie ert bar E pt ne PH S y EE ENG ue Seo do eases 111 Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings liiis nn 111 C624M C 5 06 5 Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage ooooooocococococococcoco core 11 Configuring DX8000 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings o on nn iiis sss 111 Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties iiiiiississsssssssssssssss eI 112 Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties 112 Linking Relay O tputs ta External Ev
190. g each pane for the configured cycle view dwell time For example if you click the automatic cycle view process starts Stopping an Automatic Cycle View Sequence To stop the automatic cycle view mode On the DX8000 toolbar click Cycle Views The DX8000 stops the automatic cycle view mode Selecting User Groups to Set the Cycle View Dwell Time The DX8000 allows the Administrator to control which user group can change the cycle view dwell time In this case anyone that belongs to a selected user group can change the cycle view dwell time To select a user group to have permission to change the cycle view dwell time 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX 2 From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Cycle Views Setup gt Dwell time change 3 From the Dwell time change submenu choose a user group Selecting the Cycle View Dwell Time To configure the cycle period 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EN 2 From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Cycle Views Setup gt Dwell time 3 From the Dwell time submenu choose a time period C624M C 5 06 WORKING WITH THE SITE TREE The Site tree provides access to DX8000 resources such as cameras alarm inputs and relay outputs Objects can be selected by clicking once with the left mouse button and linked by dragging and dropping the icon into the view pane with the mouse The Site tree information reflects the current DX8000 server configuration The following fig
191. gating up and down the camera menu choices Home and End These keys provide the following functionality e On screen display preset and pattern modes The Home key opens and the End key closes the iris performing the same actions as the PTZ keypad iris and buttons e Remote camera programming mode The Home key selects an option from the camera s on screen menu The End key cancels an option or exit a menu These keys perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad iris and buttons Page Up and Page Down These keys perform the same functionality in the on screen display and the preset and pattern modes as the PTZ keypad zoom and buttons Page Up zooms in Page Down zooms out Up and Down Arrows These keys provide the following functionality e On screen display preset and pattern modes The up arrow key raises the camera and the down arrow key lowers the camera The keys perform the same actions as the mouse to move the camera e Remote camera programming mode The arrow keys navigate up and down the camera menu choices The keys perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad focus and buttons Left and Right Arrows These keys provide the same actions as using the mouse to move the camera The left arrow key pans the camera to the left and the right arrow key pans the camera to the right and These keys perform similar actions as using the mouse to change the speed of camera movement The pl
192. ge is displayed 4 Click the Advanced tab For information about the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 5 In the ATM POS Name drop down box select an ATM POS device General Settings Data Format Textto Screen Advanced Diagnostics ATM POS Name tarm Posot JATM POSO1 9 r Exception Table Any field containing values must all Exception Name be found or satistied before a data device exception is generated Each data device can trigger the DX8000 to record at a special rate and for a special length of time j r ATM POS Name Action Code a ALL CODES item or merchandise sold normally Action Code User String User Mapping Table Action Code Define String Add gt Delete You can search recording data by this user mapping table Figure 113 Advanced Page 6 Inthe Exception Table section click Add The Exceptions dialog box opens Exceptions x Exception Name USER DEFINEO 15 7b Line Item l c Modifier None Value This Exception Effect Display Effect Show a OK Cancel Figure 114 Exceptions Dialog Box C624M C 5 06 7 Inthe Exceptions dialog box do the following a In the Exception Name text box enter a name or description for the exception up to 20 characters b Inthe Line Item text box enter the name of the line item up to 20 characters T
193. gent Notification setup 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed ADDING CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENTS TO BE NOTIFIED After clients have been added cameras must be configured to notify individual clients of an event A single camera can be linked to one or more client emergency agents For information on linking cameras to client emergency agents refer to Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 199 To add clients to the Emergency Agent Notification list 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kid The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The Notification page is displayed 3 Click Add The Agent Setup dialog box opens 4 Dothe following a Enter a name for the client Client names can be up to 63 characters and can include spaces but not special characters b Enter the clients IP address C lf necessary enter a port number in the Agent Port text box The default port number is 9004 Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change the Emergency Agent port number from its default of 9004 Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8000 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical 5 Click OK 6 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen C624M C 5 06 CHANGING CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENT PROPERTIES To change an existing client
194. ggered a pop up window opens on the monitor of the remote site client The window displays one or more still images taken during the event Users with Power User access and higher can configure the emergency agent notification system The first step in the setup process requires that clients be added to the emergency agent notification list To complete this step you must provide a valid name and the IP address of each client PC After clients have been added they can be linked to one or more cameras Finally the amount of time a server sends images after an event occurs and the interval between sending each image must be set NOTE Before configuring the Emergency Agent Notification make sure the Emergency Agent Client utility is installed on one or more client PCs For information on installing the Emergency Agent Client utility refer to Installing the Client Emergency Agent Application in the DX8000 Client Application manual This section describes how to setup emergency notification and includes the following topics e Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setup on page 198 e Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified on page 198 e Changing Client Emergency Agent Properties on page 199 e Deleting Clients from the Notification List on page 199 e Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 199 e Setting Server Event Transmission Time on page 200 ACCESSING THE EMERGENCY AGENT NOTIFICATION SETUP To access the Emergency A
195. h NO 50 Accessing Programming Features of Remote Cameras 0 2 correr 51 Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control sita e Lh e Lope Er breed ob egeta hdd c doe a aaa 51 Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu ooo 52 Sending Auxiliary Commands to a Device 2 tesse sie elem a A Died pac e gab PER A 54 Configuring Preset TOURS xd rito tetro es cm mi Seta pet od etus eene AE a afin uto tte rb Oe Dre eR EF i phe 55 Programming a Preset TOUE sarral tds Debe bete eben te a Deed be ias 55 Accessing a Preset Tour Group 2 22 20 ccc ccc een pap Ea a Re ea rhe ha di hern 55 Adding Fresetstoa OU usc te Sole estas O aa a 56 Deleting Presets froma Toul s 2 seen A e eeu Ae mee don bed tee oy aed See eae Garena 57 Activatingra Preset Oltra nutus Ne duet ath Eod e aiii e AS 58 De activating a Preset Tout auos EV VIE REIP ANAE r EE REESE 58 Using th KBD300A K ybOaId r rasen s sese ted etu ee e E e da eot eden em dus de Toms 59 KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features 2 0 00 cece eter n ne 59 KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features u ununun anaana nnee III ee 60 Working in Playback Mode 2 0 nnna nannan RII HR e 61 Accessing Playback Mode e eet rte te e eed ote b fla e ettet ate edet DER dcs 61 Assigning Cameras to View Panels o evade wore R E rU D E RET EUNT ERREUR dh RET Te AR Ua quee due 61 Playback On ScreenDisplay OSO ta a RR ER e a a ROO EAE M UR HEU DUS deus 61 Playback Controls Jy o epe ee tt eit Ao MARRE Fee TRE
196. he line item entry is case sensitive In this case if the transaction is displayed as all capital letters then the line item entry must be in all capital letters The DVR will search for this entry anywhere in the transaction ATM transactions do not usually contain line items The program may display a No data found error message if searching ATM transactions using line items If the line item box is left blank it is considered found or satisfied c In the Modifier drop down box select a modifier that further defines the line item A modifier must be selected before a value can be entered If a modifier is not selected the Value text box is unavailable d In the Value box enter the value The value 9999 99 maximum is used with the modifier above to trigger an exception You can use a period to separate dollars and cents but do not use a comma between thousands and hundreds e Inthe This Exception Effect section do one of the following e Accept the default display effect setting e Inthe Display Effect drop down box select Don t Show or Show 8 Click OK 9 Atthe Advanced page do one of the following e Click Apply to confirm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box e Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page Table AT ATM POS Exception Modifiers Modifier Description None Value to the right is not used and is disabled gt Greater than Trigger exception only if
197. he parts of the DX8000 application window Table AN Parts of the DX8000 Application Window Item Part Description Port Communications port drop down box where you select the port for connecting a device to the DX8000 The available choices are as follows e COMI Uses RS 232 serial data standard e COM2 Uses RS 232 serial data standard e Port 1 to 4 Uses either RS 422 or RS 485 serial data standard Device Attached device drop down box where the type of device is selected to be interfaced to the DX8000 through the communication port Configure Device configuration button that when clicked opens the Device Configuration dialog box The Device Configuration dialog box performs two functions depending on the type of device selected e For the KBD300A and dome devices only displays device configuration information e For ATM POS devices allows you to configure ATM POS device options and parameters for the selected device o Install Protocol installation button that when clicked opens the Protocol Install dialog box The Protocol Install dialog box allows you to do the following e View the current device protocols already installed e Update the device protocols Interface Mode Interface mode drop down box that allows you to select the serial data standard for the selected device The DX8000 supports COM1 and COM2 RS 232 and Port 1 to Port 4 RS 422 RS 485 O
198. he scheduled recording times for a specific record mode for one or more channels C624M C 5 06 1 Ze From the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Schedule page is displayed Click a record mode check box to select the specific record mode Right click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels that you want to clear recording times Release the right mouse button The highlighted recording times are cleared Do one of the following e To accept the change click Apply The selected time period is deleted e To cancel the change click Cancel The deleted recording times are restored amp Record Mode i Normal Wl Motion Wi Alam FP TM P0S em pu Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Cancel Apply Figure 90 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode 125 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes To clear the scheduled recording times for all record modes 1 From the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click a record mode check box to deselect the record mode No record mode is selected 4 Right click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels that you want to clear recording times 5 Release the right mouse button The highlighted recording times are cleared 6 Doone of the following e To accept the change
199. her software such as operating systems drivers for accessory devices and so forth shall be governed by the software manufacturer s upgrade policy even when said upgrades are necessary to implement an upgraded version of Pelco software 2 Whenever possible software upgrades with detailed instructions shall be provided to the customer via Web site download Pelco will not be responsible for loss of data losses due to down time or damage to product as a result of a customer attempting to perform an upgrade 3 Hard copies on appropriate medium CD ZIP floppy shall be sent to the customer at no charge upon request 4 tshall be the customer s responsibility to procure necessary hardware to perform upgrades if required necessary drives such as CD ROM or ZIP 5 Pelco cannot guarantee that all future software versions will be backward compatible with earlier hardware platforms HARDWARE UPGRADES Pelco does not provide hardware upgrades other than for hard disk storage Hard disk upgrades are available as follows 1 Notall products are capable of being upgraded for additional hard drive space For information on whether a particular model can be upgraded consult the relevant installation operation manual or technical support department at Pelco 2 Ifa hard disk upgrade is possible it is available through Pelco at established prices and is subject to the usual 24 hour turnaround for service When a larger hard drive is being substituted
200. ialog Box DISCONNECTING A NETWORK DRIVE To disconnect a network drive 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click S The DX8000 is in the Search mode 2 Click i The Export Video dialog box opens 3 Click Disconnect NetDrv The Disconnect Network Drive dialog box opens 4 Select the network drive that you want to disconnect 5 Click OK The drive is disconnected and removed from the Export Video dialog box Device area PERFORMING THE EXPORT This section describes how to export data and includes the following topics e Starting an Export Process on page 95 e Changing a Bookmarked Time Range on page 97 e Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name on page 97 e Selecting the Export Format on page 98 e Exporting a Sequence of Still Images on page 99 e Finalizing an Export Process on page 99 e Stopping an Export While in Process on page 100 e Working with DX8000 Backed Up Video on page 100 STARTING AN EXPORT PROCESS To start the export process 1 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or ak 2 Click if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode 3 Click ei The Export Video dialog box opens 4 Clickthe plus 4 sign next to a drive in the Device list Available devices are indicated by a check box to the left of the device name C624M C 5 06 95 5 Selectthe check box of the desired device If you choose a remote device select the drive and folder path where you would like t
201. ideo by Event on page 66 e Operating Playback Digital Zoom on page 67 e Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode on page 90 e Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously on page 90 ACCESSING PLAYBACK MODE To access the Playback mode gt On the DX8000 toolbar click Live ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANELS To assign a camera to a view panel 1 Draga camera from the Site tree onto a camera view pane 2 Repeat this process for up to 36 cameras PLAYBACK ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD The on screen display for playback is identical to live view with the exception of a date time field in place of the PTZ designator Figure 35 Playback OSD C624M C 5 06 61 PLAYBACK CONTROLS Use the playback controls to start playback control direction and adjust speed Click MW at any time to return to live view The playback controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode gt From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View The following figure shows the DX8000 playback controls D do lt gt O Q G Figure 36 Playback Controls The following table describes the parts of the payback controls Table T Parts of the Playback Controls Item Part Description Frame By Frame Reverse Each frame is displayed in reverse with each click of the Frame b
202. idual clients of an event A single camera can be linked to one or more client emergency agents Up to 32 IP addresses can be assigned to each camera The DX8000 can transmit images up to 10 IP addresses simultaneously To link a camera to one or more clients C624M C 5 06 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Notification page is displayed In the Camera Setup section click a camera button Camera 1 to Camera 16 The Emergency Agent Selection dialog box opens Click the check box to select the name of the client site you want to notify when a motion alarm or video loss event is detected by this camera Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to sixteen cameras on the current site Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen Configure the server event transmission time For information on setting the duration and transmission interval refer to Setting Server Event Transmission Time on page 200 199 200 SETTING SERVER EVENT TRANSMISSION TIME After clients have been added and linked to cameras you must set the amount of time a server sends images after an event occurs and the interval between sending each image Set the duration for sending images and the transmission interval after clients have been added and cameras are linked to one or more clients For information on adding clients refer to Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified on page 198 For information
203. in window and includes the following topics e DX8000 Menu Bar on page 22 e DX8000 Toolbar on page 25 e Displaying the DX8000 Window from a Page on page 26 Description of Operating Modes on page 26 e Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 C624M C 5 06 19 The following figure shows the parts of the DX8000 main window 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 a LL LEGE aury gt Ll Figure 2 DX8000 DVR Main Window The following table describes the parts of the DX8000 application window Table A Parts of the DX8000 Application Window ltem Part Description O Title Bar Displays the DX8000 application title 2 Menu Bar Provides access to drop down menus Toolbar Provides access to display setup export and search tools o Site tree Displays top down hierarchical management of DX8000 resources such as servers cameras alarms and relays o View Panels Display live and playback video from attached cameras A view panel consists of view panes channel Up to 36 view panes can fit in a single view panel multiple panes A panel can display from one to 36 individual cameras page 26 e View pane A view pane is a division of a view panel Each view pane contains only a single camera e View panel A view panel is made up of the entire DX8000 viewing area View panels are divided into For additional information ab
204. ing table describes the user group s access rights Table AY User Group Access Rights View View Shut Add Change User Groups live Recorded je poi oe Down Sys Remove User Group ae Video Video tem Users Properties Administrators v wv wl e e v v v v v Power Users v v v v v v v Standard Users v v a p Restricted Users w Guest Users wv C624M C 5 06 173 174 DEFINITION OF CAMERA SECURITY ACCESS Users are limited by the Admin to the cameras they are allowed to view Access to a camera is determined by its security designation The Admin can configure access rights to any user group for any of the following functions e Camera security e View live video e Operate PTZ Playback video e Set PTZ e Access Export menu Only users with High Security access can view cameras designated as High Security Medium Security cameras can be viewed by users with Medium Security access and higher All users except Guest can view Low Security cameras All users can view No Security cameras The following table summarizes camera security levels and user access Table AZ Camera Security Levels G No Security Low Security Medium Security High Security roups Cameras Cameras Cameras Cameras Administrators wv wv wv wv Power Users w w a a Standard Users w k k Restricted Users a w Guest Users e ADDING NEW USERS A
205. ion picture adjustment audio and video loss detection settings o Linking Click the Linking icon to configure relays and alarms associate relays and alarms with cameras link relays to alarms and link cameras to other cameras e Schedule Click the Schedule icon to build custom recording schedules set image resolution frame rate and image quality and configure relay settings 0 Network Click the Network icon to set up the network configuration and communication port settings O Backup Click the Backup icon to configure and perform backups Q O User Click the User icon to add delete or change user accounts Q Site Click the Site Setup icon to add delete and configure additional DX8000 Series DVRs System Click the System icon to set up additional system options O Ext Monitor Click the Ext Monitor icon to configure an additional display monitor This icon appears only if the optional display card has been installed D Notification Click the Notification icon to configure emergency agent and e mail notification options C624M C 5 06 CAMERA SETUP Depending on your system s current configuration up to 16 video cameras can be connected to a single DX8000 The following section illustrates basic camera configuration You must be logged in as an Administrator or Power User to configure cameras This section describes how to setup the camera and includes the following topics Basic Camera Setup on page 105 Moti
206. k controls Figure 58 Bookmark Controls The following table describes the bookmark controls Table Z Bookmark Controls Button Command Description Add Bookmark Does the following e Adds a red bookmark flag to mark the beginning of a start point e Adds a gray bar to indicate the range between the start point and end point Remove Bookmark Removes the selected bookmark Remove All Removes all bookmarks Bookmarks C624M C 5 06 91 CREATING BOOKMARKS To select a region to export 1 2 9 10 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or al Click if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode Select a camera from the Site tree Locate the timeline slider at the beginning of the range you want to bookmark You can use the drop down box and spinner buttons above the timeline to locate a bookmark Click A red bookmark flag appears on the timeline v Select all 01 C09 Camera 9 ot 21 2004 y 0 3 33 00233 PE 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 Figure 59 Setting a Starting Bookmark Locate the timeline slider at the end of the range you want to bookmark Click The bookmark flag and the region between bookmarks turn gray Exporting a bookmarked region of video requires start and end bookmarks If only one bookmark is set video will not be marked for expo
207. k page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 To set up a static IP address 1 In the Network page verify that the Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP check box is not selected 2 In the IP Address box enter a unique IP address for example 10 10 0 170 The last three digits must be different for each recorder for example 171 172 173 and so forth 3 In the Subnet Mask box enter the subnet mask for example 255 0 0 0 is the default 4 In the Default Gateway box enter the gateway address the IP address of the default router on your immediate network segment 5 Click Apply C624M C 5 06 SETTING UP TCP IP AND BANDWIDTH THROTTLE The DX8000 uses the TCP IP networking protocol to communicate over LAN and WAN networks TCP IP uses logical network ports to organize data transmissions and to ensure that data packets are delivered to the proper application For example e mail is traditionally delivered through TCP IP port 25 and web pages through port 80 The following table describes the ports assigned to direct video and control information into and out of the DX8000 You should keep port numbers set at their default values unless there is a known conflict with your existing network infrastructure Consult your network administrator before changing any port information on the DX8000 Table AM TCP IP Ports Used by the DX8000 Port Number User Changeable Description 9002 Yes Base port
208. k to change from 1 hour intervals to 10 minute intervals e Click again to change from 10 minute intervals to 1 minute intervals e Click once to change from 1 minute intervals to 10 minute intervals e Click again to change from 10 minute intervals to 1 hour intervals 7 Clickthe thumbnail of the interval you want to search 8 Click gt to view video C624M C 5 06 Double clicking a thumbnail image will enlarge the image and begin playback 9 Click Bl to return to thumbnail images mov Camera i E o Camera a Camera 3 HD Camera 4 Camera tt ie Vo Comere 12 Be Camera 13 Camera 14 12 00 00 AS Hes PR GMA NNNNNENNANNENNENEL SS Figure 47 DX8000 DVR Thumbnail Search Screen C624M C 5 06 POS SEARCH The DX8000 allows a user to search any 24 hour period of recorded POS video and data To record ATM POS video and data the ATM POS 76 devices and DX8000 must first be connected and configured as follows e Physically connect the ATM POS devices to the DX8000 e Set up camera to ATM POS device linking e Configure the DX8000 ATM POS settings for each attached ATM POS device e Start an ATM POS transmittal and verify that the DX8000 is receiving the ATM POS video and data For information about setting up the DX8000 for ATM POS applications refer to the following sections e Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events on page
209. l C624M C 5 06 USER SETUP The User page allows an Administrator Admin to add delete and change the properties of users The Admin has full permission of the DX8000 Users are subdivided into groups and each group is granted a particular level of access The Admin is the only one who can change the permission for all lower level users A lower level user cannot have more permission than a higher level user This section describes how to configure users and includes the following topics e Built in User Accounts on page 173 e Definition of User Access Levels on page 173 e Definition of Camera Security Access on page 174 e Adding New Users on page 174 e Modifying User Properties on page 175 e Changing User Passwords on page 175 e Changing a User s Group Affiliation on page 176 e Deleting Existing Users on page 176 e Setting Login Timeout on page 176 e Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User on page 177 ACCESSING THE USER PAGE To access the User page 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click O The User page is displayed The following figure shows the User page Restricted User Group Properties Standard User Standard User Group Properties Playback Properties Playback PTZ Setup Properties Playback Add Remove User Timeout Manual 2 Set Password Properties Auto Login User Restricted Guest X 5 Cancel Apply Figure 122 User Page C624M
210. l Server Requires Authentication b Enter your e mail server address c Enter your user name User names can be up to 31 characters in length and cannot include spaces or special characters d Enter your password Passwords can be up to 19 characters in length and cannot include spaces or special characters Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification Enable Notification r Mail Group 5 Full name pxe000 First Floor Lobby None al D E mail Address 28000 first fr pelco com To idoe pelco com Add to Group 17 None zj cc Add to Group fiSmDeparment 7 sl fism Department y I Delete Edit Manage Groups Subject DX8000 Emergency E mail Notification r Frequency O mail SMTP mail outgoing com 1 Minute z My E mail Server Requires Authentication I Stat 7 00 13 AM End 9 10 19 AM E Server address smtp domainl pelco com m Notification Items User name securityguard Event Selected Channels O Motion Password E e Dalam O Video Loss Test E mail Notification gt Cancel Apply Figure 139 Basic E Mail Notification Setup C624M C 5 06 Testing E Mail Notification You test the e mail notification configuration in the Emergency E Mail Notification page For information on accessing the Emergency E Mail Notification page refer Ac
211. le or disable emergency e mail notification 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 nthe Emergency E mail Notification page do one of the following e Click the Enable Notification radio button to enable e mail notification e Click the Disable Notification radio button to disable e mail notification C624M C 5 06 201 202 Setting Up the E Mail Server Set up the e mail server in the Emergency E Mail Notification page For information on accessing the Emergency F Mail Notification page refer Accessing the Emergency E Mail Notification Setup on page 201 To set up the e mail server 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click Ell The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Enter a name in the Full Name text box You should enter a name that reflects the DX8000 server sending the notification for example DX8000 First Floor Lobby Names can be up to 31 characters long and can include spaces but not special characters Enter your e mail address in the E mail Address text box Enter the address of your local SMTP mail server Obtain this information from your network administrator If your e mail server requires you to log in do the following a Select the check box labeled My E mai
212. lexing MUX display card that provides two additional analog monitor outputs The first one nearest to the top of the unit mirrors the output of the main VGA video output The second one nearest to the bottom of the unit is user definable If your DX8000 Series DVR includes the optional MUX display card the External Monitor button will appear on the screen in Setup mode Users with Power User access or higher can assign cameras to and configure the display card NOTE The optional MUX display card must be installed in your DVR and an external monitor s must be connected in order to make use of the additional analog monitor outputs Refer to the installation manual for instructions on how to connect analog monitors to the MUX display card This section describes how to setup an external monitor and includes the following topics e Accessing the External Monitor Setup on page 191 e Setting Up Camera Mapping on page 191 e Configuring Display Override on page 197 e Using the External Monitor Option on page 197 ACCESSING THE EXTERNAL MONITOR SETUP If the optional DX8000MUX8 or DX8000MUX16 display card is not installed in your DX8000 DVR options on the external monitor configuration screen will be grayed out To access the monitor configuration screen 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card has been installed The External Outp
213. lick 29 The Link page is displayed C624M C 5 06 111 Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties To configure basic relay operating properties 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 to display the Link page 3 In the Relay Settings section do the following a In the Relay Channel drop down box select the relay you want to configure b Inthe Relay Name text box enter an optional new name for the relay Relay names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters You can also rename sites cameras alarms and relays from the Site tree by clicking twice slowly on each object s name c In the Relay Type section click the NO NC button to toggle the default output type for each relay NO normally open or NC normally closed 4 Click Apply r Relay Settings Relay Channel RELAY Relay Name Retay01 mk Relay Type 1 2 B 4 aj 6 7 8 J NO J NO J NO NO ND ND NO NO 16 El 10 11 12 13 14 15 vo vo J No No No No No No Figure 74 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Relay Settings Section Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties Most applications will not require you to change relay and alarm settings from their default states To configure basic alarm input operating properties 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Cli
214. lick Delete 4 Click Save 5 Click Exit to return to the main screen Preset tour group 1 xj Available presets C624M C 5 06 Number Name Dwell Time Sec 1 Preset01 2 2 Preset02 7 3 Preset03 5 O 4 Preset 4 2 Os Preset 5 2 Na Presetfl 2 Y Add to Group Preset Tour Group fvor z v Numer Nane Del TimeSec oi Preset 1 2 Qn TAN O 3 Preset03 5 E p Save Apply e Figure 33 Deleting Preset from Tour 57 ACTIVATING A PRESET TOUR This section describes how to activate a preset tour You can save a preset tour for later use without engaging the tour by not performing step 5 and continuing on to step 6 without clicking Apply To activate a preset tour 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click EX 2 Click ES and then to bring up the preset tour dialog box 3 From the MM box select the preset tour 1 4 you want to activate 4 Click Save 5 Click Apply 6 Click Exit to return to the main screen 7 Click ES on the PTZ keypad to exit programming mode 8 Click on the PTZ keypad to activate the tour Preset tour group xj Available presets y Number Name Dwell Time Sec 4 Preset01 2 Preset02 Preset03 Preset 4 Preset05 Presetfl JoO0000 sl ik Add to Group Preset Tour Group v 02 _ y Number Name Deme Sec D 1 Preset01 O 2 Preset02 O 3 Preset03 5 Delete Save Apply Exit mee as Figure 34 Activating a P
215. lick Live e Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Search 2 click gt to start video playback 3 Use the Digital Zoom control to zoom and pan video playback Figure 41 Playback Digital Zoom Control C624M C 5 06 67 The following table describes the parts of the Digital Zoom control Table W Parts of the Digital Zoom Control Item Part Description 1 Zoom In Allows you to magnify the entire pane Click the Zoom In button to magnify to the next preset magnification level x1 6 o Zoom Out Allows you to reduce to the previous preset magnification Click the Zoom Out button to reduce to the previous magnification level Pan Left Allows you to move the magnified playback image to the left O Pan Right Allows you to move the magnified playback image to the right O Pan Up Allows you to move the magnified playback image up Q Pan Down Allows you to move the magnified playback image down Zoom Restore Allows you to return the zoomed image to the original size ZOOM USING THE MOUSE The DX8000 allows you to use the mouse to drag a selection region rectangle around a specific area of a pane to zoom in and out A small rectangle about 0 25 inches 6 4 mm square provides a x6 zoom factor As the selection area increases in size the zoom in out factor decreases x5 x4 x3 X2 and x1 e Ifyou e fyou use the mouse to selec use the mouse to selec If zooming in
216. licking a relay opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands e ON Allows you to turn the relay on e OFF Allows you to turn the relay off 7 3 Remote site Expands and collapses the remote DX8000 site Right clicking the remote site name opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands e User Log In Clicking User Log In opens the User Log In dialog box where you enter your user name and password to log into the remote DX8000 site e Userlog Out Clicking logs you out of the remote DX8000 site e Connect Allows you to connect to the remote site Disconnect Allows you to disconnect from the remote site This section describes how to work with the Site tree and includes the following topics e Assigning Cameras to View Panes on page 32 e Setting Up Links on page 32 e Removing Links on page 34 ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANES The DX8000 provides view panes that are organized into view panels The DX8000 includes 36 view panels that can display cameras from up to five connected DVR sites For information on view panels refer to Working with View Pane and Panel on page 26 The DX8000 Series DVR supports triplex operation Triplex operation means that the DX8000 will continuously record even while users view simultaneous live and playback video or modify the system setup To assign a single camera to a view pane 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click 2 Inthe Site tree click the
217. link setup options111 event PTZ link settings event recording link settings event relay link settings relay and alarm settings relays linking to cameras33 removing34 setting up32 linking and event recording setup111 live audio23 38 108 Live View mode51 local area network LAN 201 logical network ports145 logs files23 Backup Export Login ID list with time Network Connections System Failure System On Off Video Loss mapping camera191 220 menu bar20 menus Edit22 Export24 Favorite24 File22 file21 Help24 View23 menus shortcut local site31 relay32 remote site32 mode extended view mode standard view43 instant record starting41 instant record starting and stopping40 instant record stopping41 instant recording39 interface150 live recording41 Live View mode working in51 live view working in35 normal recording39 recording modes scheduled123 See recording mode monitor external191 motion detection of113 124 See also relays detection zones107 emergency e mail notification201 emergency notification198 motion event recording mode setting up124 multiple event recording124 MUX display card192 National Television System Committee NTSC 135 network drive disconnecting from169 mapping169 network ports logical145 network requirements connecting DX8000 DVRs17 DX8000 network properties14 normal recording mode39 notification e mail110 emergency agent110 Notification page198 C62
218. log box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page opens to the Relay and Alarm Settings page 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab Linking Relay Outputs to Motion Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to motion detection events 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 In the Motion Detection Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera channel from the Camera Channel drop down box b Click the button of each relay you want to link to the selected camera You can also drag relays onto cameras in the Site tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply Camera Channel CAMERAD1 Motion Detection Link Settings Nu Camera Name mero ee Relay Setting R1 R2 B R3 J R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 o W Figure 76 Event Relay Link Settings Motion Detection Link Settings Section C624M C 5 06 113 Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to an alarm event 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click kil The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 In the Alarm Link Settings section do the following a Select an alarm channel from the Alarm Channel drop down box b Click the button for
219. ly in an upward direction to your left Tae Figure 43 Zoom Out Using Mouse PANNING A ZOOMED IMAGE This section describes how to use the hand tool and mouse wheel to zoom in and out To pan a zoomed portion of video within the view panel 1 To place the DX8000 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following e On the DX8000 toolbar click Live e On the DX8000 toolbar click Search 2 Right click within the view panel The mouse pointer now resembles a hand 3 Click and drag the mouse using the left mouse button in the direction you want to move the video image 4 Right click again to return to zoom mode era 3 Figure 44 Panning Zoomed Video with the Mouse C624M C 5 06 69 Working in Search Mode The DX8000 Series DVR supports four video search methods index thumbnail POS and pixel For information about the user access level required to search video data refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 173 To enter the Search mode gt On the DX8000 toolbar click Search This section describes how to use the Search mode and includes the following topics e Search Window on page 71 e Displaying a Deinterlaced Image in the Search Mode on page 73 e Index Video Search on page 73 e Thumbnail Video Search on page 74 e POS Search on page 76 e Pixel Video Search on page 87 e Working with Special View and Search Methods on page 90 70 C624M C 5 06 SEARCH WINDOW C624M C 5 06
220. m e ATM POS In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens Adjust the parameters in the camera settings section Click OK Click Apply cS Frae a Camera 1 Settings Camera 1 Ee Camera 2 Camera 3 Image Resolution Camera 4 esoxse0 Camera 5 Camera 6 Frame Rate HH Camera 7 iSimagestSecond Camera 8 Image Quality lt Camera 9 noma m Q9 Normal Recc Motion Recc QD Alarm Recor 27 ATM POS Re Instant Recording Camera 10 D Camera 11 enable zl Camera 12 Camera 13 Frame Rate Configuration Camera 14 of gt Configure Relays i EB EH EH LEE Figure 99 Custom Camera Settings Panel 133 134 Examples of Custom Camera Settings The DX8000 allows you configure customized camera settings for following recording modes e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS The following figure shows camera settings for the supported mod Normal Motion Camera 9 Settings Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution Image Resolution zo x240 ezo x240 Frame Rate Frame Rate During Motion o Images Second 30 ImagesiSecond Image Quality Pre Motion Frame Rate NORMAL X o Images Second X Pre Motion Image Quality BEST es Alarm Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution ezo x240 Frame Rate During Alarm oo ImagesiSecond Pre Alarm Frame Rate o Imagesi
221. m111 ATM P0S113 motion detection107 recording modes124 video loss detection110 exception155 C624M C 5 06 export setup22 Ext monitor accessing the Ext Monitor page191 camera mapping automatic camera mapping setting up191 manual camera mapping setting up192 overview191 external monitor option197 MUX display card configuring interrupt override197 overview191 sequence instance appending to an existing sequence list197 creating193 deleting196 loading an existing list194 modifying in the list195 extended view mode43 external events113 F file size video image134 frame rate about calculating138 advanced configuring136 basic configuring135 maximum setting137 overview123 135 range of135 resolution value136 G getting started exiting the DX800017 first time login16 powering on the DX800015 shutting down the DX800015 starting the DX800015 user security levels15 H hard disk14 hardware DX8000 AUD audio card108 external equipment54 MUX display card192 upgradeing14 Help enabling disabling1 90 online viewing 90 219 import setup22 index view panel21 indicators audio38 camera38 instant recording38 on screen PTZ control38 pan tilt and zoom38 record38 site38 information port 45 instant recording indicator38 instant recording mode39 interface mode150 K keypad43 L language selecting14 15 linking alarm input removing from camera34 alarm inputs linking to cameras33
222. mal Low Lowest Alarm Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest ATM POS Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre Motion 1 60 sec Pre Alarm 1 60 sec Pre Event 1 60 sec Post Motion 1 180 sec Post Alarm 1 180 sec Post Event 1 180 sec This field appears for information purposes only To change thi Image quality is a function of video compression Higher quali s setting refer to Configuring the Frame Rate on page 135 y video images require larger file sizes C624M C 5 06 CONFIGURING THE FRAME RATE The DX8000 can record at frame rates up to 480 images per second ips by National Television System Committee NTSC standards and 400 ips by Phase Alternating Line PAL standards This total frame rate capacity is distributed among eight or sixteen cameras depending on the configuration of your unit Resolution and frame rate values can be assigned evenly among all cameras or can be configured independently for individual cameras Frame rate values can also be customized according to recording mode type normal alarm or motion Two setup modes are provided to allow Power Users and Administrators to configure recording frame rates on the DX8000 All cameras are optimized to provide 30 ips frame rates at 320 x 240 resolution for NTSC 352 x 288 resolution for PAL Basic mode allows changes to be made in the frame rates available to each camera while resoluti
223. mber of images 1 to 999 you want to save in the sequence 3 Select the time interval between each saved image in the sequence Options are as follows e Continuous e 0 5 seconds e 1 second e 2 second e 3 second e 4seconds e 5 seconds Export Format C AVI C ASF C Native C BMP JPEG C TIF r v Audio Record V RealTime Image Count 1 Interval MOS Figure 68 Still Image Export Formats FINALIZING AN EXPORT PROCESS This section describes how to finalize an export process The following guidelines are applicable e Audio export is available only with DX8000 native AVI and ASF video formats e Real Time setting applies only to DX8000 native AVI and ASF video formats e When the Real Time check box is selected the DX8000 will export video so it can be played back in real time 30 fps for the same length of time as the original recording For example if video was recorded at 1 fps this means the DX8000 will insert 29 null frames for every 1 frame of actual video Thus one minute of video recorded at 1 fps 60 frames total will play back for one minute at 30 frames per second 60 frames of actual video interspersed with 1 740 null frames If the Real Time check box is not selected one minute of video recorded at 1 fps will play back in two seconds in real time Figure 69 illustrates the two video streams 1 one padded with null frames to match the actual time duration and 2 another stream
224. n completed the DX8000 displays a series of thumbnails below the search grid Each thumbnail contains the first image of recorded video for the specified date and time range period NOTE A pixel search might not detect obvious movement Viewing the thumbnails For information on how to view the video thumbnail refer to Viewing a Video Thumbnail on page 89 To search video by analyzing changes in screen pixels de C624M C 5 06 On the DX8000 toolbar click al On the Search control click ge Select a camera from the Site tree From the drop down box select the date on which you want to begin your search 87 88 Select the start and end times to define your search range Using your mouse highlight areas on the grid that you want to search for pixel changes e Hold down the eft mouse button and drag to select areas e Hold down the right mouse button and drag to clear areas Adjust the pixel sensitivity threshold Moving the slider to the left decreases sensitivity and moving it to the right increases sensitivity Click Start and then wait for the progress line on the status bar to return to Ready Use the icon to show and hide the pixel grid for a clearer view in the search screen 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 09 10 11 12 13 m L eee all ee D d n lc Figure 56 Pixel Search Screen C624M C 5 06 VIEWING A VIDEO THUMBNAIL After the search has been completed a series of thumbnails appe
225. n data the action code must be created first before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the action code is defined the action code will not find the data structure within the transaction data The search criteria is based on the following e Channel Camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data e Date time Date and time window within which the transaction s were recorded e Action code Special two character filter that defines a specific transaction event To search for transactions by action code 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click ak 2 On the Search control click OM The POS search view is displayed 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following a In the DX8000 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected or b Do the following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Set the date and time range for the search 5 Inthe Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Action Code The Action Code drop down box is available b In the Action Code drop d
226. nated remote client If no image exist then the system attaches a red colored pane to the e mail The red pane contains the text Video Loss For information about setting up emergency notification refer to Emergency Notification Setup on page 198 The DX8000 can be configured to send an e mail notification in response to a video loss event In this case the last available video image when the event occurred is attached to the e mail If no image exist then the system attaches a red colored pane to the e mail The red pane contains the text Video Loss For information about setting up emergency notification refer to Emergency E Mail Notification Setup on page 201 The record icon turns purple indicating a video loss recording regardless of which schedule is setup The video loss utility is constantly running in the background If a schedule is not available then it the record icon defaults to purple If the DX8000 loses feed video on that channel is recorded To set up video loss detection 1 2 3 On the DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Video Loss Detection section do one or both of the following e Click the Loss of synchronization check box to select loss of synchronization option e Click the Low level of video check box to select low level of video option and do the following 1 In the Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time section set the start time 2 In the Low L
227. nd playback video from the same camera 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click Ei 2 Draga camera from the Site tree to a view panel 3 Click gt to begin playback 4 Drag the same camera from the Site tree onto a different view panel while video is playing C624M C 5 06 Exporting Video Power Users and Administrators can export sections of prerecorded video to magnetic or optical media The DX8000 must be in the Playback or Search mode to export video You cannot access Export in Live mode To export video or still images to a CD R RW or DVD R RW you must have Nero Express CD burning software version 6 3 1 25 installed on the DX8000 DVR This section describes how to export video and includes the following topics e Exporting Bookmarked Video Regions on page 91 e Inserting and Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 93 e Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter on page 94 e Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 94 e Performing the Export on page 95 e Stopping an Export While in Process on page 100 EXPORTING BOOKMARKED VIDEO REGIONS You can bookmark multiple regions of video along the timeline for export Bookmarked regions are designated with start point and end point bookmarks Multiple regions can be bookmarked along a single 24 hour timeline but only a single channel can be exported at a time Bookmarked regions are listed in the Export Video dialog box at the time of export The following figure shows the DX8000 bookmar
228. ndows file naming conventions Alternatively you can view log files by clicking View Log and then selecting the desired log file Log files can be opened and printed using a text editing program such as Windows Notepad 7 Click Save Log Information eo Choose View OS Log View Save As Postove System On Off Figure 132 Exporting a Log File SELECTING THE LANGUAGE The DX8000 interface comes from the factory configured for the English language The system supports multiple languages in addition to English Language changes must be configured from both the DVR s operating system and within the DX8000 application To select the appropriate language for your location 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click qa The System page is displayed 3 Make sure that the regional and language settings of the DVR s operating system have been properly set up Refer to the installation manual for information on regional setup 4 nthe Language section select the appropriate language from the Select Language drop down box Options are as follows e English e French e German e Italian e Polish e Portuguese e Russian e Spanish 5 Click Apply SETTING THE SYSTEM TIME Time should be set on the DX8000 before it is put into use Setting the internal clock for each DVR on the network ensures that each accurately reflects the local time This section describes how to set
229. nfigurable addresses Only one address can be assigned to any one camera The DX8000 displays an error message if you attempt to assign the same address to different cameras 2 To view the camera DIP switch address setting for all attached local cameras click View The DIP Switch Address View dialog box opens The assigned DIP switch setting for all attached cameras is displayed 3 In the Picture Adjustment section adjust picture properties by moving sliders for Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation As you adjust the picture properties of a camera on the local DVR changes will be reflected immediately in the view area near the top of the screen Changes made to cameras at a remote site will not appear in the view area until you click Apply 4 Click Default to return all picture property settings to the normal state You can click the Hide Show button to clear the view area to get a better look at your picture property changes Refer to step 2 in Motion Detection Setup on page 107 5 Click Apply Channel Information Name Camera 2 Camera 2 Resolution 720 x 480 Motion Zone Zonel Frame Rate 25 fps Recording Mode Motion Recording Linking Pre Alarm 30 seconds Post Alarm 60 seconds Linked Alarm 2 Linked Relay None Audio Installed Enable Camera Properties r Motion Detection Selected Channel Camera 2 Disable Number of Blocks 4 2
230. ng View Panels on page 27 e Navigating View Panels on page 27 WORKING WITH VIEW PANE AND PANEL The DX8000 displays video from each camera in its own viewing pane e View pane A view pane is a division of a view panel Each view pane contains only a single camera channel Up to 36 view panes can fit in a single view panel e View panel A view panel is made up of the entire DX8000 viewing area View panels are divided into multiple panes Each panel can display from one to 36 individual cameras C624M C 5 06 The following figure illustrates how the DX8000 viewing area is structured Figure 3 View Panes and Panel for 4 Division Display The following table describes the view pane and panel as shown in the figure above Table J View Panes Panel Item Description a Shows a view pane for a for division display e Shows the view panel which contains view panes CONFIGURING VIEW PANELS The DX8000 can display up to 36 cameras simultaneously in a single panel To select a view panel division 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click amp 2 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click a view panel division button For information on the view division buttons refer to DX8000 Toolbar on page 25 NAVIGATING VIEW PANELS This section describes how to move between the DX8000 view panes and panels This section includes the following topics e Navigating Between View Panels on page 27 e Expanding and Collapsing View Pan
231. ng on the display format Figure 4 Example of Single 4 9 and 16 Division View Panels The following table describes how the DX8000 view panes and panels are organized Table K How View Panels are Organized Display Type Grouping Vow Panes View Panels Single 1 32 1 32 4 Division 1 8 4 8 9 Division 1 4 9 4 16 Division 1 2 16 2 25 Division 1 2 25 2 36 Division 111 36 1 6 10 13 Division e 1 5Division 1 6 6 6 e 2 8Division 1 4 10 4 e 1 12 Division 1 4 13 4 Pressing one of the view panel division buttons sets the number of visible channels displayed in the panel The following figure illustrates the view panel identifier C624M C 5 06 ku Panel 1 8 502 C02 Camera2 f07 14 2005 e 12 4 7 d 00 Sj 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 E I EIITIEIIEEMIIEI Disk EEE LLL Figure 5 View Panel Identifier The following table describes how the DX8000 view panes and panels shown in Figure 4 are organized Table L View Panes and Panel Item Description 1 Indicates the panel number being viewed 2 Indicates how many pane are displayed per panel Expanding and Collapsing View Pane To expand a view pane to fill the entire panel gt Double click a view pane The view fills the entire view panel To collapse a view
232. nge of data to be backed up 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click amp 3 On the Backup schedule page to add a backup schedule click Add The Add Backup Schedule dialog box opens Add Backup Schedule i xj r Device Selection r Time Setting Backup Start Time E 6 CD R Rw C Weekly E DVD R RW eo NOT INSTALLED Time 13 y 2 23 E de TAPE DEVICES Er e DAT AIT DLT 7 o NDT INSTALLED Backup Time Range B HARD DISK DRIVES E1 S Remote drive eo NOT INSTALLED amp g Removal di E EI s Time 13 2 5 A s 2 r Channel Record Type Peforrferepeps pe 0 Map a network drive Disconnect mapped drive Categories an Recording y Estimated Backup Size Cancel Figure 119 Add Backup Schedule Dialog Box Daily O TEAC CD w552E 1 9 T2 TS T4 T8 Te E a Q 4 nthe Time Setting section to set up the time schedule do one of the following a For daily recording click Daily if it is not selected and do the following 1 Click the Time drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to start 2 Click the Backup Time Range drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to stop or b For weekly recording click Weekly if it is not selected and do the following 1 Under the Backup Start Time click the Day drop down box Select th
233. nt Recording Link Settings tab In the Motion Record Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Motion Source Camera drop down box b Click the button of each camera you want to begin recording when motion is detected by the source camera Click Apply Motion Source Camera Motion Record Link Settings Camera Name Camera 1 cee Record on Source Camera Motion o cl C2 ES C4 t5 C6 t Ce cg cid en C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 Figure 80 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to a single alarm input 1 2 116 On the DX8000 toolbar click kill The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab In the Alarm Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an Alarm channel from the Alarm Channel drop down box b Click the button of each camera you want to begin recording when the source alarm is triggered Click Apply Alarm Record Link Settings Alarm Channel ALARMO1 Alarm Name Alamo in Record on Source Alarm E vent e Lc Lon e2 es J co es ee Figure 81 Event Recording Link Settings Alarm Record Link Settings Section C624M C 5 06 Linkin
234. o store the exported file You can also click the Browse button to access the file system for the appropriate folder If your DX8000 is connected to a network that supports shared folders and drives you can map a network drive from within the Export Video dialog box For more information refer to Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 94 The following table shows a listing of available devices Table AA Available Backup Space Type Description Optical drives The DX8000 supports the following drives e CD R e DVD R Hard disk drives The hard disk drive can be any of the following e local drives e Remote drives Removable drives USB flash drives 6 Select the check box of the video time range you want to export You can export multiple time ranges simultaneously For more information refer to Changing a Bookmarked Time Range on page 97 7 Click in the File Name box and then type the file name for each selected video time range You can accept the default file name assigned to the time range For more information refer to Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name on page 97 8 Select the export format For more information refer to Selecting the Export Format on page 98 9 Click Export m xl m Device Time Range O Optical disk drives S StatDay StartTime EndDay EndTime Name Ei CD R RW DL 10132004 08 00 00 103132004 0802
235. ogging out will return you to the Guest account To disconnect from a remote server refer to Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 17 To log the current user out of the system and return to the Guest account gt Click File gt User Log out You can also log out of a local or remote DVR by right clicking its site name from the Site tree and then selecting User Log Out from the quick menu 16 C624M C 5 06 EXITING TO THE WINDOWS OPERATING SYSTEM You must have Administrator user access to exit to Windows Refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 173 for information on users security levels You must have a Windows password to exit to the Windows operating system For information on the Windows default password refer to the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide To exit the DX8000 application and log into the Windows operating system 1 From the DX8000 menu bar choose File Exit The Shut down dialog box opens 2 Click Exit to Windows The Shut down dialog box opens 3 Click OK The Log On to Windows dialog box opens 4 Enter the Windows password and then click OK The system logs you into the Windows operating system REMOTE DX8000 LOGIN You can view live and playback video from up to five DX8000 Series DVRs simultaneously To access the features of a remote DX8000 a link must be established between the local and remote DVRs Refer to Adding a Remote Site on page 177 for instructions
236. ol character for indicating the end of a transmission The end of text string Decimal Specifies the type of control character that marks the end of a transaction line Decimal 13 represents the ASCII CR control character User String Allows you to enter an end of line string Monetary Format Includes the following options Monetary Unit Text box for entering the monetary symbol Thousand Separator Symbol used in transaction data to separate number by thousands Decimal Separator Symbol used in transaction data to separate dollar and cents Time Format Allows you to set the following options to match those in the transaction data Date Selects the date format Month Type Selects the month format Time Selects the time format Time Period Selects the time period 12 or 24 hour Character Format Allows you to specify a character filter Special Device Character No available at this time Custom Device Filter Contains the character filter Add Moves the character filter into the Custom Device Filter table Delete Deletes the selected filter in the Custom Device Filter table Control Code Contains a selection of control codes for creating a desired filter Special Character Contains a selection of characters for creating a desired filter Range Not applicable The followi ng table describes the transaction start and end parameters Table AR Transaction Start and End Paramete
237. ommand descriptions22 exiting application22 overview of application window19 DX8000 application logging in to16 DX8000 application window panels26 panes26 DX8000 setting up102 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 143 dynamic IP address remote site177 selecting143 C624M C 5 06 dynamic link library DLL files installing163 dynamic link library DLL files updating163 E e mail notification overview210 sending to groups211 sending to individuals210 video loss event sending in response to110 e mail server201 emergency agent notification110 accessing Emergency Agent Setup page198 camera linking to client emergency agents199 clients adding198 changing emergency agent properties199 deleting from notification list199 Emergency Agent Client utility required198 overview198 port145 server event transmission time setting200 emergency e mail notification accessing Emergency E mail Notification page201 alarm201 alarm events sent in response to205 e mail groups201 e mail server configuring202 enabling disabling201 group adding206 adding members207 deleting207 deleting members from group208 modifying207 modifying member attributes209 overview206 local area network LAN 201 motion events sent in response to205 overview201 setting up201 testing configuration203 time period notification frequency setting up204 overview204 setting the time of day204 video loss events sent in response to206 events alar
238. on Detection Setup on page 107 Audio Setup on page 108 Applying Settings to all Cameras on page 111 BASIC CAMERA SETUP To set up camera picture and pan tilt and zoom PTZ options 1 C624M C 5 06 Do one of the following e Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page e ifthe Setup dialog box is already open click cm The Camera page is displayed In the Camera Properties section do the following a b C Select a camera from the drop down box You can also select a camera from the Site tree by clicking on it Select the Disable check box if you want to disable the camera Enter an optional new name for the camera Camera names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters Set camera security level Available security levels are as follows e None Camera can be viewed by all users e Low Camera can be viewed by all users except the Guest account e Medium Camera can be viewed by users with Standard User access and higher e High Camera can be viewed by users with Power User access and higher In the Protocol drop down box select the appropriate PTZ protocol for the camera or select No PTZ if the selected camera does not support PTZ functions Some of the supported protocol options are as follows e NO PTZ Disables all PTZ functions for the current camera e PELCO C Coaxitron e PELCO D Pelco proprietary e PELCO P Pelco proprietary
239. on establishing a network connection with a remote DVR After establishing an active connection refer to Logging in to a Remote Site on page 17 for login instructions This section includes the following topics e Connecting to a Remote Site on page 17 e Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 17 e logging in to a Remote Site on page 17 e logging Out of a Remote Site on page 18 CONNECTING TO A REMOTE SITE To connect to an active DX8000 server on the network 1 In the DX8000 main window right click the remote site name from the Site tree The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Connect from the shortcut menu DISCONNECTING FROM A REMOTE SITE To terminate a connection with a remote DX8000 server 1 In the DX8000 main window right click the remote site name from the Site tree The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Disconnect from the shortcut menu LOGGING IN TO A REMOTE SITE After a connection to a remote site has been established log in with a valid user name and password for that site To log in to a remote site 1 In the DX8000 main window select a remote DX8000 Series DVR site from the Site tree 2 From the DX8000 menu bar choose File User Log in You can also log in to a remote site by right clicking its site name and then selecting User Log In from the shortcut menu 3 Enter a user name and password for the remote site C624M C 5 06 17 LOGGING OUT OF A REMOTE SITE Logging out of the local or
240. on is used to enhance the image during a search activity To search video using the deinterlaced option 1 Onthe menu bar click View Display deinterlaced image 2 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click a The DX8000 is placed in the Search mode INDEX VIDEO SEARCH Index search allows a user to search video by events such as motion detection or alarm activation Events are listed chronologically and by type To ensure that the proper camera channel is selected check the camera information box above the playback timeline or verify that the desired view panel is framed with a thin red outline To search video by motion or alarm events 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click al 2 On the DX8000 Search control click a 3 On the DX8000 toolbar click a view panel division button 4 From the Site tree drag the camera channel you want to search onto one of the view panels 5 Click the view panel of the channel you want to search 6 From the drop down box on the playback timeline select the day you want playback to begin 7 Select the event type you want to view from the event type drop down box Only events recorded for the selected camera are listed in the index A sensor event is identical to an alarm event Options are as follows All None Motion Alarm in ATM POS Video Loss 8 Select an event from the index 9 Verify that the Select all check box is selected Deselecting the Select all check box will disable playback
241. on linking cameras refer to Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 199 To set the duration for sending images and the transmission interval 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Inthe Option section of the Emergency Agent page enter the amount of time in seconds that you want the DX8000 to continue sending still images after an alarm motion or video loss event has been detected 4 Enterthe time interval in seconds that you want the DX8000 to wait between sending each still image 5 Click Apply C624M C 5 06 EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION SETUP The DX8000 can be configured to send e mail notifications alerting users of motion alarm and video loss events Users with Power User access and higher can configure e mail notification Notifications can be sent to a single e mail address or a group of addresses either immediately after an event occurs or periodically according to a predefined schedule You can configure up to 32 e mail groups Up to 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group Before sending notifications you must provide information about your e mail server and establish what events motion alarm and video loss that you want to include in the e mail message Timing and frequency of the e mail notifications must also be set You should test the e mail notification function immediately after configuration to en
242. on number are valid the POS transaction is displayed in the POS Search Table 8 In the POS Search Table click a transaction entry The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 9 On the playback controls click Forward Playback The video recorded for the transaction is displayed in the Video window Playback 01 10 2006 y or 3 TE 00 24 fot 10 2006 y oo os 00 Transaction Information Device Name 8TM PO0S01 v Transaction Number 24 m Data Information Transaction with Exception Only Line ltem Action Code Exception Code aa 01 10 2006 09 04 39 562 DD Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 24 DATE 1 10 2006 TIME 9 5 0 T BONE 4 59 SUB TOTAL 4 59 TAX 0 37 TOTAL 4 96 Figure 51 Searching an POS Event by Transaction Number 82 C624M C 5 06 SEARCHING FOR ALL TRANSACTIONS WITH EXCEPTIONS The DX8000 allows you to search for transactions that meet conditions defined by one or more exceptions In this case you must configure your search criteria based on the following e Channel Camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data e Date time Date and time window within which the transactions were recorded To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created first before recording the transaction data If the transaction dat
243. on values must remain constant Advanced mode allows users to change both frame rate and resolution settings This section describes how to configure the frame rate and includes the following topics e Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box on page 135 e Setting the Basic Frame Rate on page 135 e Setting the Advanced Frame Rate on page 136 e Understanding the DX8000 Frame Rate Calculations on page 138 Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box To access the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens Setting the Basic Frame Rate The DX8000 Series DVR is optimized to provide sixteen cameras of continuous video recording with a frame rate of 30 ips at a resolution of 320 x 240 NTSC Basic mode allows only frame rate adjustments to be made Access the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box to set the basic frame rate For information on accessing the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box refer to Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box on page 135 To set frame rate values for cameras in Basic mode 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed
244. ontaining the entry small orange juice enter ora The search returns all transactions that contain the word orange Search by abbreviation An example for a line item containing the entry Soda 6 pk enter 6 pk The search returns all transactions that contain the abbreviation 6 pk Action Code A two letter abbreviation designating a specific action code For information about action codes refer to Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 150 Exception Code A predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data For information about exceptions refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 155 Start and Stop Start Initiates a search event Stop Ends a search event C624M C 5 06 Table Y Parts of the POS Search View Continued Item Part Description O POS Search Table Lists the data discovered in response to the POS options selected for the transaction and data information e Channel Number From 1 16 e Device Name By default ATM POS01 to ATM POS16 The device name can be changed e Transaction Number Number assigned by the ATM POS device to the transaction data e Date Time Date and time transaction is recorded e Exception Yes if an exception filter is active for the transaction data has an exception No if the transaction does not have an exception filter The transaction and data information are based on the A
245. or delete a schedule and includes the following topics e Changing an Existing Schedule Profile on page 131 e Deleting an Existing Schedule Profile on page 132 Changing an Existing Schedule Profile To change a profile 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected 4 nthe drop down box select the type of schedule you want to change Options are as follows e All Days e Weekdays e Weekends e Custom Mode 5 Select the schedule profile from the drop down box 6 Using your mouse assign new recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule Refer to Setting Up the Camera Hecording Mode on page 124 for instructions 7 Click Save 8 Click Apply 9 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen Q View Year View O Back July 2005 Next Qa E New T Delete Apply Once Per Month Once Per Year Start oz 2005 E End Record Mode JE Normal Bl Motion Wi Alam PP ATM POS 7 H Figure 97 Month View Page C624M C 5 06 131 132 Deleting an Existing Schedule Profile To delete a schedule profile 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected
246. or the user 9 Password q e Confirm password re 4 Back Next gt Cancel Figure 123 Add New User Dialog Box MODIFYING USER PROPERTIES Follow the steps below to change user attributes such as user name and group affiliation Users with Administrator or Power User access can change name and description properties of lower level users Only Administrator level users however can change a user s group affiliation To modify a user s properties 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click O The User page is displayed 3 Do one of the following e nthe main user list 1 Click a user name 2 Click Properties The Property dialog box opens e In one of the group lists 1 Click a user name 2 Click Properties The Property dialog box opens 4 Editthe following user properties e Username e Full name e Description e Group 5 Click Apply in the Property dialog box 6 Click Apply in the User Setup screen An Administrator level user can also change the group affiliation of users by dragging user names among different groups CHANGING USER PASSWORDS Administrators and Power Users can change or reset an existing user s password OB24M C 5 06 175 176 To change a user s password il Ze On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click O The User page is displayed Click a user name
247. osea to te tet eod exe erepta ote t oet M e OT Ra ee tS oia tea 96 Export Time Barge cz tee ete ek detener aret bete aed ori Lbs eu enisi al de edle ede 97 Default File Names x AREE a PRSE PERDER de gh 97 Renaming Export Time Ranges eer mper eres premi Ee en EA tene IE aalan wad RE c HELPER E E DARE RR 98 stillImage ExportFormats satan arta tratas tta bud i M bd eames el ns 99 RealTime Versus Non R al Time Export a 00 Parts ofthe DX8000 Setup Dialog BOX erret v ERAI I fake IY RRNUERUIAN EN RR EPA EEEE QURE MERIDIA 03 Camera Pages ser dde aod o Ra oO Adore vcr theta odes Mores do ig bad tattle PR E SP Pr QUERN ITANE 106 Camera Motion Detection Setup fea teen ee deep e edd a tete eh den eee da a Ide ce ER TM eR e ENS 07 Video SS DeteC HOT residet dte foe cosctetur a Lee booten reds us REA A eRe GS UR LS Mh 110 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Relay Settings Section iliis 112 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Alarm Settings Section 2 liiis 113 Event Relay Link Settings Motion Detection Link Settings Section 2 iilii 13 Event Relay Link Settings Alarm Link Settings Section 20 0 0 0c ec e 14 Event Relay Link Settings ATM POS Link Settings Section 2 20 liiis e 14 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section 2 20 62 annann nunnurnar eeraa naana e 115 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section oooooooococococooooco coro 16 Event Recording Link Settings
248. ound field INSTANT RECORDING This section describes the instant recording mode Users with Power User access and higher can configure the DX8000 for recording video both instantly and in accordance with a preset schedule The Instant Recording mode is enabled from the Schedule page Instant recording is activated from the main window by double clicking the Instant Recording icon If the DVR is not in the normal recording mode you can use the instant recording mode to manually start and stop a video recording session instantly For information about adding the Instant Recording icon to the OSD refer to Adding Instant Recording to OSD on page 40 This section includes the following topics e Enabling and Disabling Instant Recording on page 39 e Adding Instant Recording to OSD on page 40 e Starting and Stopping Instant Recording on page 40 ENABLING AND DISABLING INSTANT RECORDING This section describes how to enable and disable the instant recording mode and includes the following topics e Enabling Instant Recording on page 40 e Disabling Instant Recording on page 40 For more information on instant recording refer to nstant Recording on page 39 C624M C 5 06 39 Enabling Instant Recording To enable the Instant Recording mode 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C 3 In the Camera Settings Panel from the Instant Recording drop down box sele
249. out view panels and panes refer to Understanding View Panes and Panels on 20 C624M C 5 06 Table A Parts of the DX8000 Application Window Continued Item Part Description PTZ Control Panel Allows users with access rights to operate camera lens control features and to program PTZ presets patterns auxiliary outputs and tours This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ control panel For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 Index View Panel Allows users with access rights to search motion and alarm events within a 24 hour period specified in the playback timeline This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the index view panel For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 Playback Timeline Displays a 24 hour timeline marked with color coded video events Allows users with Standard User access rights to select a date and time for playback This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback timeline For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 O Playback Control Provides buttons for users
250. own box select an action code For information about action codes refer to Using Action Codes on page 155 C624M C 5 06 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid transactions containing the line item are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 Inthe POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Live Start 01 16 2006 13 2 00 5 00 zd End 0 16 2006 v papa 1 Transaction Intormation Device Name 8TM P0501 3b Transaction Number m Data Information Transaction with Exception Only TPP Line Item IV Action Code CH 0 Exception Gode 3 Start Search I Stop Search 6 F Bata Overlay Enable Figure 55 Searching Transactions by Action Code PIXEL VIDEO SEARCH The DX8000 allows a user to search any 24 hour period of recorded video automatically for changes in screen pixels This feature can be configured to identify motion events even when motion detection has not been enabled on a camera This section describes how to search video by changes in screen pixels and includes the following topics Searching Video Based on Changes in Screen Pixels on page 87 Viewing a Video Thumbnail on page 89 SEARCHING VIDEO BASED ON CHANGES IN SCREEN PIXELS DX8000 pixel video search is accomplished in two steps Searching recorded video for changes in screen pixels After the search has bee
251. p 2 2 ttn e 98 Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified oiiiiiiiiisssisssssssssssssss I n eens 198 Changing Client Emergency Agent Properties iiiiiiissssssssssssssssss III le 199 Deleting Clients from the Notification Uist sess cc a ER DIR RUOLI le as Med dct 199 Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents 20 0 0 0 0 0 ccc III n nnn 199 Setting Server Event Transmission ME s s o iie er tacon and estat 200 Emergency E Mail Notification Setups eers a rer RAE ROPA P Ace ad A NURSE E run 201 Accessing the Emergency E Mail Notification Setup iisiiiissssssssssssssssssss se 201 Contiguring Emergency E Mail Notification enorm ree etre bv teer a nete ci Ep TAA es Ame EE 201 Enabling or Disabling E Mail Notification 0 0 RR He 201 Setting Up the E Mail Server t esca rr A EN a ee eed leis 202 Testing E Mail Notification cissssssssssssssss nn eR Rm lee 203 petting Up the Time Period aaa ke nb Gel RE DAS b RIS IDPTOR ERI Dni lots eel As P quede 204 Configuring E Mail Notification Frequency issssssssssssssssssss II e n 204 Settingithe Time ob Days i oe oc REVO a Letzte dad edet 204 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Motion Events o oooococcococococo coco cr e 205 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Alarm Events 0 0 0 0 0 0 sse 205 Sending E Mail Notifications In Response to Video Loss Events ooooooooococococococoocoro rr 206 Setting Up E
252. p DHCP on page 144 or Setting Up a Static IP Address on page 144 C624M C 5 06 143 144 Network DNSAWINS Port Device Site Name px System ID xe m Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP IP Address 10 10 0 170 Subnet Mask 25 0 0 0 Default Gateway 10 10 D 1 DX8000 Base Port 3002 Software Upgrade Port 9003 Information Port 8005 pzz 5 0 Mbps Bandwidth Throttle t f i 256K 5M 10M Image quality BEST bd Network Information Cancel Apply Figure 108 Network Setup Page Setting Up DHCP Your network must support DHCP and an active DCHP server must be present for dynamic addressing to work If you select DHCP and your network does not include an active DHCP server the IP address settings will default to addresses in the 169 254 x x range Consult your network administrator for more information Access the Network page to set up the DHCP options For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 To configure the DVR to acquire a dynamic IP address through DHCP 1 In the Network page click the check box labeled Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP 2 Click Apply Setting Up a Static IP Address The DX8000 allows you to set up a static IP address This information can be obtained from your network administrator Access the Network page to set up the static IP address For information on accessing the Networ
253. pacity for that resolution To set the frame rate for individual channels use the sliders in the top portion of the screen Select a frame rate from 1 to 30 ips according to the available capacity for that channel Click Default to set the Maximum Frame Rate Settings values back to their factory defaults Click OK Click Apply when you return to the Schedule Setup screen 640x480 y sips 320x240 5 30 320x240 y 151PS 320240 y 15 320240 y 15IPS 320x240 v 15 320x240 v 151P5 320x240 v 15 320x240 v 151PS 320240 v 151P5 320x240 v 151PS 320 240 w 151PS 3204240 v 151PS 3204240 v 15 320x240 v 151PS 320x240 v 15 Maximum Frame Rate Settings Global Frame Rate Settings 320x240 o 320x240 ag ine 6 640x240 720K240 1 os 640x240 720x240 1 ors 7 640x480 720x480 milf SIPS B40 480 7204480 Default DK Cancel Figure 102 Advanced Frame Rate Configuration Screen 137 138 Understanding the DX8000 Frame Rate Calculations The DX8000 uses a complex algorithm to calculate the amount of recording resources available for each channel This calculation takes into account factors such the number of enabled cameras whether uniform or mixed resolution values are used recording type continuous alarm or motion and the frame rate settings of enabled channels The resulting calculations provide the operator with a margin of available
254. page refer to Setting Up DX8000 Network Access on page 143 For information about the Port Device tab refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 147 Data Format Name E R 650 Transaction Format Transaction Number Transaction Start Transaction End ME i IV Find by Symbol Bo TEXT X WELCOME Text X THANK YOU The end of text strina Decimal fi User String Monetary Format Monetary Unit fs Thousand Separator Decimal Separator zj Time Format Date D A mb a oom Month Type t E Time ps MM be MN mc m Time Type pha Character Format 1111 Special Device Character Custom Device Filter Type Char Control Code uuum 1 Control Character NUL 0 il a fdo Special Character 2 Control Character LF 10 3 Control Character CR 13 Delete Range E Figure 111 Data Format Page The following table describes the parts of the Data Format page C624M C 5 06 151 152 Table AQ Parts of the Data Format Page Item Command Description Data Format Name Text box where a specific name for the data format template is created Transaction Format Includes the following options Transaction Number Allows a transaction symbol to be entered Transaction Start Selects the control character for indicating the start of a transmission Transaction End Selects the contr
255. page 118 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to External Events on page 115 CONFIGURING BASIC RELAY AND ALARM SETTINGS The DX8000 can support up to 16 alarm inputs and relay outputs Eight channel DVRs include 8 alarm and 8 relay terminals while sixteen channel DVRs include 16 of each This section describes how to configure basic relay and alarm settings and includes the following topics e Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage on page 111 e Configuring DX8000 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings on page 111 e Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties on page 112 e Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties on page 112 Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage The DX8000 server might experience an external AC power outage and impact how the DX8000 relay and alarm features function e Power outage Relays configured as NO are closed if the DX8000 is server is shut down by a power outage or if the AC cord is unplugged e Power button Relays configured as NO are closed if the DX8000 power button is pressed and held down In the scenarios above a relay will remain closed as long as the DX8000 is powered down In this case alarms or sirens connected to the relays might produce a false alert Configuring DX8000 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings To access the Link page to program alarms and relays 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click It The Setup dialog opens to the Camera setup page 2 C
256. pens the DX8000 Setup File Export dialog box for exporting the DX8000 system configuration settings to a specific file name and location The Export feature also allows you to export the DX8000 settings to specified location for later retrieval For more information refer to Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export on page 183 Import Setup Opens the DX8000 Setup File Import dialog box for importing a DX8000 system configuration file For more information refer to Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export on page 183 C624M C 5 06 View Menu The following table describes the DX8000 View menu commands Table D View Menu Commands Command Description OSD Opens a submenu with the following choices e Site Name A global setting that when selected displays a site s name in the respective view pane e Camera Name A global setting that when selected displays a camera s name in the respective view pane e Video Recording A global setting that when selected displays an icon in the upper right corner of the pane and enables video recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane e Audio Recording A global setting that when selected enables audio recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane The DX8000 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio may not be of the same quality as live audio e PTZ A global setting that when selected enables PTZ capability for the cameras
257. plus sign 4 next to a expand the tree if necessary 3 Do one of the following e Toassign a single camera to a view pane drag the camera from the Site tree onto a view pane e Toassign all cameras from a single site to the view panes at once drag a onto a single view pane The default arrangement of Y cameras is Camera1 Camera2 Camera3 from left to right top to bottom 4 Repeatthe process in step 3 for up to 36 cameras from up to five DVR sites SETTING UP LINKS The DX8000 allows you to set up links in various configurations e Youcan link multiple alarms and relays to a single camera e Youcan link a single alarm or relay to multiple cameras e Youcan link alarms and relays to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes e You can also manually turn a relay on and off from the Site tree This section describes how to set up links and includes the following sections Manually Turning a Relay On and Off on page 33 Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 33 Linking a Relay Output to a Camera on page 33 Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs on page 33 C624M C 5 06 Manually Turning a Relay On and Off To manually turn a relay on and off 1 Right click a relay The shortcut menu opens 2 Click ON or OFF to turn the relay OFF if it is on or ON if it is off Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera The DX8000 allows you link alarm inputs to a camera You can link multiple
258. pping an Export Process To halt an export that is in process and delete any video data stored to that point From the DX8000 menu bar choose Export gt Cancel Export WORKING WITH DX8000 BACKED UP VIDEO The DX8000 allows you to view and search backed up video Use the DX8000 server to back up video You must use the DX8000 Client application to view backed up video For more information about viewing backed up video refer to the section titled Viewing and Searching Backed Up Video in the Client Applications Help or the Client Applications manual and Viewing Backed Up Video on page 170 C624M C 5 06 Printing Images The printing feature of the DX8000 produces a hard copy of the current on screen image A Windows compatible printer must be installed to take advantage of the DX8000 s print feature For information on installing a printer refer to the installation manual that came with your unit The DVR must be placed in Playback or Search mode to use the print feature Playback is paused once the print button is pressed To print an image displayed in a pane 1 2 Click or al Locate the video image you want to print For more information on locating video refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 61 and Working in Search Mode on page 70 Click MI to freeze the image for printing Click OK PRINTING IMAGES IN THE DEINTERLACED MODE If you are printing images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second
259. r Timeout drop down box e Time limits range from five minutes to one hour in five minute increments e Selecting Manual from the drop down box will suspend the automatic logout feature A user will remain logged in until the user logs out or another user logs in Click Apply C624M C 5 06 ASSIGNING AUTOMATIC LOGIN PERMISSION TO A USER The DX8000 allows one user to be able to automatically log in to the DX8000 application The administrator must assign automatic login permission to the user Once automatic login permission is assigned to the user the user will be automatically logged in to the DX8000 application In this case the assigned user does not have to enter the user name and password NOTE Automatic login user permission makes the DX8000 more vulnerable because a higher level of user is logged in every time To assign automatic login permission 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click O The User page is displayed 3 In the Auto Login User drop down selection box select a user 4 Click Apply The next time the DX8000 application is started the assigned user is logged in automatically SITE SETUP This section describes how to connect to a remote site and includes the following topics e Adding a Remote Site on page 177 e Finding Active Remote Cameras on page 180 e Activating Remote Sites on page 181 e Editing a Remote Site on page 181 e Deleting a Remot
260. r View Month View schedules are recurrent Schedules can be set for subsequent weekdays weekends every day or a single day This section describes how to create a monthly or multiple day schedule and includes the following topics Creating Multiple Day Schedules on page 128 Creating Single Day Schedules on page 129 Creating Multiple Day Schedules To create a recording schedule to recur indefinitely 1 2 10 11 128 From the DX8000 toolbar click at The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected Select All days Weekday or Weekends from the drop down box Click New The New File Name dialog box opens In the New File Name text box enter a new filename for the profile The profile file name follows the standard Windows file naming conventions Click OK Using your mouse select the recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule For information on camera scheduling refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 124 Click Save Click Apply Click the Apply button at the bottom of the Schedule page Month View Year View Qo Back August 2005 Newt gt Jaugweekends Ez E New Save Delete Apply Once Per Month Once Per Year Start foe 2005 E End o 2005 Finish on End Date Ek Ek
261. r and name of the current camera On Screen PTZ Control Facilitates mouse control of PTZ functions Refer to Operating the On Screen Pan Tilt and Zoom PTZ Controls on page 41 00 O Instant Recording Starts stops instant recording if enabled 38 C624M C 5 06 CUSTOMIZING THE ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD Users with Guest and Power User access and higher can add and delete on screen display items To customize the on screen display 1 From the DX8000 menu bar choose View OSD and then select the items you want to add to or delete from the OSD Items include e Site Name e Camera Name e Video Recording Audio Recording e PTZ e Instant Recording e POS e Select All displays all items in each pane e Background Color ET File Edit view Export Favorite Help v Ste nane Log v Camera Name Resolution gt v Video Recording Cycle Views Setup v Audio Recording Extended View v PTZ Index View v Instant Recording p j 7 v POS Display deinterlaced image Y Select All Camera 4 EAST Cameras Background Color gt Figure 13 DX8000 DVR OSD Menu Options 2 Do one of the following e From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Background Color gt Set Color to add a contrasting background field behind each OSD display item e From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Background Color gt Disable Background to remove backgr
262. r named DX8000 site 2 e Pressing 1 CAM expands the Site tree for DX8000 site 1 and selects the first camera But it does not assign the selected camera to a view pane or display video e Pressing 2 CAM expands the Site tree for DX8000 site 2 and selects the first camera But it does not assign the selected camera to a view pane or display video F2 F3 ON OFF Cameras are assigned numerically 1 16 to the respectively number video These controls display DX8000 video in the following divisions e F2 OFF Single division view e F3 MOM 4 division view e AUX ON 9 division view e AUX OFF 16 division view To place the KBD300A in the shift mode gt On the KBD300A keyboard press the SHIFT button The LED indicator should be on C624M C 5 06 Working in Playback Mode Recorded video can be played back one channel at a time on the DX8000 Like live video recorded video is viewed from the camera view panels on the main screen Refer to Understanding View Panes and Panels on page 26 for information on view panels Only users with Standard User access and higher are allowed to view recorded video This section describes how use the Playback mode and includes the following topics e Accessing Playback Mode on page 61 e Assigning Cameras to View Panels on page 61 e Playback On Screen Display OSD on page 61 e Playback Controls on page 62 e Playback Timeline on page 64 e Playing Back Video by Time on page 65 Playing Back V
263. rame Rate cationes ea PEEOM ion 35 setting the Advanced Frame Rate ssc crac deu ed etr pes s RAM p RR pe 36 Understanding the DX8000 Frame Rate Calculations 2 200020 IRR 138 setting Up Advanced Relay OUtpUT 5 2005 vs Geert nha Emu A NR Rea Tae ago IER RS etna 138 Configuring Advanced Motion Activated Relay Output 139 Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output iiiiiissssisssssssssssssse Ie 140 Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output 2 20 0 141 Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output 142 Setting Up Network Properties 43 Contiguring the DXBODO for Network ACCESS eire m Ree a etr Eo beg a 143 Setting Up DXB000 NBBWOIK AECESS ce tre EORR A RIISUA UN xe EE E wen Abacos Mi 143 Setting Jp DACP a zero nti pp meth tee th pitt tie e UR VINE aba ki al aste edes 144 setting Upa Static IPAddress ai eee Ime A EMEN ER EE a 144 Setting Up ICP IP and Bandwidth Thirettle s 6o pee e betur rd ete bie ede RE t 145 Accessing NEWMAN REID TUI ORE EIUS NA ES bce KURA S aan 146 Setting DpDNS WINS ta E NE ONDARTqDO RR HE PEORES bb S RUPEE aa 46 Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties 2 2 coreo 147 Understanding the Port Device Page 2 0 cece I e ee e 147 Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports 00 s ne 49 Setting Up COM1 and COM Port Properties iiiiisssssssssssssssssssss s e eee 49 Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties
264. ras from the Site tree onto each view panel until all panels have been assigned a camera d From the Min and Sec drop down boxes select the amount of time the sequence instance will remain on the monitor e Click Add The instance is added to the Sequence Table Do one of the following Repeat step 3 for each additional sequence instance you want to add to the sequence list e f you want to apply the custom setting without saving click Apply and skip steps 5 through 9 Click Save The Save Profile dialog box opens Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence Click OK In the Sequence Table click Apply Click Apply in the External Output page Manual Camera Mapping Mode Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Sequence Table Sequence Duration D 0 Min 30 Sec gt Seauence Nol 2 E Load Save e _ Delte Appl e Override monitor output in response to this type of event Alarm input Pas Motion alarm override dwell time 1 zi 1 60 Second Figure 135 External Monitor Manual Mapping 193 194 Loading an Existing Sequence List To load an existing sequence list 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card has been installed 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a
265. reset Tour To reactivate the last preset tour you configured gt On the keypad click Preset DEACTIVATING A PRESET TOUR To deactivate a preset tour do one of the following gt e Use the mouse to move the on screen PTZ control e Activate a PTZ preset C624M C 5 06 USING THE KBD300A KEYBOARD The KBD300A allows you to operate certain DX8000 live view display functions and control camera PTZ operations from a keyboard rather than a mouse When connected to the DX8000 server the KBD300A supports two modes the Standard mode and the Shift mode The Shift mode is entered by pressing the Shift button and is indicated by the lighting of the shift button LED For information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual This section describes the KBD300A operational features and is organized as follows e KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features on page 59 e KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features on page 60 For information about connecting the KBD300A to the DX8000 refer to the DX8000 Installation manual For information about configuring DX8000 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 161 KBD300A STANDARD MODE OPERATIONAL FEATURES The KBD300A Standard mode allows you to control certain DX8000 operation features in the view pane from the keyboard This section describes the KBD300A Standard mode feature
266. rgency E Mail Notification Setup on page 201 ACCESSING THE SETUP MODE The Setup Mode is accessed from the DX8000 toolbar by clicking the Setup icon When clicked the Setup icon opens the Setup dialog box in the DX8000 view panel The major configuration categories are displayed on individual tabbed pages Fach configuration page contains all of the options and parameters for the respective function that allow you to customize how the DX8000 operates for your particular application Access a setup page by clicking its icon that is displayed on the right side of the view panel The Setup dialog box allows Administrators and Power Users access to the DX8000 s setup functions However only Administrators can define user names and passwords for new users To access the Setup Mode On the DX8000 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the default Camera page 102 C624M C 5 06 UNDERSTANDING THE SETUP DIALOG BOX The Setup dialog box opens in the DX8000 view panel to the default Camera page Excluding the video visible through the Camera page Motion Zone window you do not see video from any of the other setup pages You must exit the Setup dialog box to access the DX8000 functions in the main window The following figure shows the parts of the Setup dialog box Motion Zone r Channel Information D Roa E Name Camera 2 Camera 2 ial Resolution 720 x 480 Frame Rate 25 fps oo Recording Mode Motion Recording Pre Alarm
267. riate fields This information can be obtained from your network administrator 1 Primary DNS server IP address 2 Secondary DNS server IP address 3 Primary WINS server IP address 4 Secondary WINS server IP address 3 Click Apply to update the configuration C624M C 5 06 SETTING UP PORT AND DEVICE COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES The system must be powered on and you must be logged in as a Power User or Administrator to configure communication port settings Refer to the instructions that came with your peripheral device for correct settings C624M C 5 06 This section describes how to set up port and device communication properties and includes the following topics e Understanding the Port Device Page on page 147 e Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 149 e Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 150 e installing or Updating Device Protocols on page 163 UNDERSTANDING THE PORT DEVICE PAGE This section describes the Port Device page The following figure shows the Port Device page Network DNSAWINS Port Device r Communication Port Configuration Communication Port The selected device is used by this port 9 5 K Interface Mode Parity Q Baud Rate 8500 1 Q Data Bits Stop Bits NONE t a e bits A lal hs O Cancel Apply Figure 110 Port Device Page 147 The following table describes t
268. rs Value Description None First part of transaction field is not used CR Carriage return character 13 in ASCII LF Line feed character 10 in ASCII FF Form feed character 12 in ASCII DATE Date field TIME Time field TEXT Ten selected another field appears to let you enter a text string up to 20 characters that defines the start of the transaction C624M C 5 06 Using Custom Device Filters The DX8000 allows you to use a custom device filter to remove unwanted characters from the data input port These characters may be printer commands or some other type of device control overhead Fach entered line of text in the Custom Device Filter table defines a separate character filter A filter can be a combination of exact characters to match character ranges to match and character counts Incoming characters matching any of the character filters will be discarded Use the Control Code drop down box Special Character drop down box and Range text box to create the desired filter and then transfer the created filter to the Custom Device Filter table by clicking the Add button Creating a New Data Format You create the data format based on information contained in the ATM POS transaction For example a sales receipt provides detailed transaction information The data format values determine how data from ATMs or POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stre
269. rt Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each additional region you want to bookmark for that camera Click if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 8 if you are in Search mode Click and follow the directions in Performing the Export on page 95 CLEARING BOOKMARKS This section describes how to clear bookmarks and includes the following topics Clearing a Single Bookmark on page 92 Clearing All Bookmarks on page 93 Clearing a Single Bookmark To clear a single bookmark 1 Select a bookmark flag from the timeline The bookmark flag should change to a light green color 2 Click to remove the selected bookmark 92 Figure 60 Removing a Single Bookmark Clearing All Bookmarks To clear all bookmarks gt Click Remove All Bookmarks INSERTING AND REMOVING A USB FLASH DRIVE The DX8000 supports both USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 flash drives To ensure data is not lost or corrupted when exporting data to a USB flash drive follow the steps listed in Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 93 This section describes how to insert and remove a USB device and includes the following topics e Installing a USB Flash Drive on page 93 e Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 93 INSTALLING A USB FLASH DRIVE This section describes how to install a USB flash drive To install a USB flash drive into the DX8000 1 Insert the USB drive into the USB 2 0 port on the DVR s front panel Figure 61 Installing a USB fla
270. s defeated the DX8000 recording timeline is impaired and without notice previously recorded data can over written by new data To set the system time 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ell The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click q The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Date Time Setup section do the following a In the Date Time drop down box select the current month day and year b Select the current time WARNING Attempting to set the system clock to a time that is earlier than the current system time will require that you either delete all data recorded between the current time and the new time or that you do not delete previously recorded data but commence recording only after the system time has exceeded the recorded time One exception to this rule involves Daylight Saving Time For more information refer to the Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time on page 188 c Click Update d In the Time zone drop down box select the correct time zone e Click Update 4 Click the Apply r Date Time Setup Date Time Wednesday August 03 2005 y 3 40 03 PM Update Time zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana y Update Figure 133 System Setup Time Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time The DX8000 ensures that no data is lost when the system clock is changed to reflect Daylight Saving Time or Standard Time The DX8000 follows the Windows operating system clock chang
271. s and Folders 3 In the favorites area click a favorite 4 Click Move to Folder The Move to Folder dialog box opens Move to Folder ve Favorites e Building 6 Camera Views Building 6 Camera Views Figure 11 Move to Folders Dialog Box 5 Select a destination folder 6 Click OK The favorite is moved under the destination folder C624M C 5 06 37 LIVE VIEW ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD The DX8000 s OSD consists of camera and site information that is superimposed on each view pane Fach display item in the OSD can be customized for both live and playback viewing The following figure shows the Live View OSD pane Figure 12 Live View OSD Pane The following table describes the parts of the Live View OSD pane Table N Parts of the Live View OSD Pane Item Part Description O Piz Indicates that the PTZ control is enabled Indicates that audio recording is enabled The DX8000 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio may not be of the same quality as live audio Indicates camera recording mode and status A blinking REC indicator signifies event recording e Green indicates normal recording e Blue indicates motion recording e Red indicates alarm recording e Yellow indicates event recording e Purple indicates video loss recording Site Designator Lists the number and name of the current site Camera Designator Lists the numbe
272. s functions The Standard mode is effective within the DX8000 view pane You can program camera presets and patterns operate the camera PTZ features and assign cameras to panes For detailed information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about configuring DX8000 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 161 The following table describes the KBD300A Standard mode operational features specific for the DX8000 server Table R KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features Keyboard Control Action Joystick Controls the camera s PTZ operation Number PRESET short Moves camera to the programmed preset position Number PRESET long Programs the current camera position to the desired preset number Number PATTERN long Starts the pattern record mode ACK Stops the pattern record mode Number PATTERN Runs the desired pattern Number AUX ON AUX OFF Turns the specified auxiliary output on or off Number MON Assigns the selected camera to the desired view pane The active view pane is highlighted To place the KBD300A in the standard mode gt On the KBD300A keyboard press the SHIFT button The LED indicator should be off C624M C 5 06 59 60 KBD300A SHIFT MODE OPERATIONAL FEATURES The KBD300A Shift mode allows you to control certain DX8000 op
273. s motion applications wo years on Esprit and WW5700 Series window wiper excluding wiper blades wo years except lamp and color wheel on Digital Light Processing DLP displays The lamp and color wheel will be covered for a period of 90 days The air filter is not covered under warranty Eighteen months on Dx Series digital video recorders NVR300 Series network video recorders and Endura Series distributed network based video products One year except video heads on video cassette recorders VCRs Video heads will be covered for a period of six months Six months on all pan and tilts scanners or preset lenses used in continuous motion applications that is preset scan tour and auto scan modes Pelco will warrant all replacement parts and repairs for 90 days from the date of Pelco shipment All goods requiring warranty repair shall be sent freight prepaid to Pelco Clovis California Repairs made necessary by reason of misuse alteration normal wear or accident are not covered under this warranty Pelco assumes no risk and shall be subject to no liability for damages or loss resulting from the specific use or application made of the Products Pelco s liability for any claim whether based on breach of contract negligence infringement of any rights of any party or product lia bility relating to the Products shall not exceed the price paid by the Dealer to Pelco for such Products In no event will Pelco be liable for
274. scribes how to use the PTZ controls and includes the following topics e Operating the PTZ Controls on page 41 e Adjusting the Camera Lens on page 43 e Adjusting the Camera Zoom on page 44 e Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 45 OPERATING THE PTZ CONTROLS To operate the on screen PTZ controls 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click EX 2 Select a PTZ enabled camera from the Site tree C624M C 5 06 41 42 3 Place the mouse pointer in the middle of the camera s view pane The mouse pointer will change to a black cross when on screen PTZ control is available Figure 15 On Screen PTZ Control 4 Click and hold the left mouse button and then drag the mouse pointer in the direction you want to move the camera The display changes to an arrow indicating the direction of the mouse Figure 16 On Screen PTZ Movement 5 Release the mouse button when you have repositioned the camera to the desired location C624M C 5 06 ADJUSTING THE CAMERA LENS The keypad is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the keypad To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View For information on changing view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 26 To adjust camera lens features gt Click the plus or minus button next to the zoom focus and
275. scription DB DEBIT CARD amount tendered with debit ATM or credit RA RCVD ON ACCT customer payment toward charge account balance DC DRAWER CLOSED no display RF REFUND payment of refund to customer DD DISCOUNT discount entered as absolute amount RT RETURN merchandise returned DO DRAWER OPEN no display ST SUBTOTAL sale subtotal DP DEPOSIT deposit amount paid pending purchase SX TAXABLE AMT taxable subtotal DR DEPOSIT RETURN deposit return TI CURRENT TIME displays description field DS PCT DISCOUNT discount as percentage of cost or total TK TRANSACTION RECEIPT NUMBER displays description field El EMPLOYEE SIGN ON to register TN Tim Norris publicly viewable EO EMPLOYEE SIGN OFF register TR NEGATIVE TOTAL negative amount as the total FC COMPLIMENTARY complimentary or on the house charge TT TOTAL total amount due FS FOODSTAMPS amount tendered in food stamps WIC and TX TAX tax amount so forth GA PREPAID GAS gasoline prepayment after pumping VD ERROR CORRECT void of last item entered GP GAS PREPAID gasoline prepayment VX VOID correction of entered item within current transaction C624M C 5 06 Creating an ATM POS Exception To create an ATM POS exception 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the device drop down box select an ATM POS device 3 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration pa
276. sh drive 2 Wait five seconds while the DX8000 recognizes and automatically installs the device REMOVING A USB FLASH DRIVE You can remove a USB device within the DX8000 environment In this case you do not have to exit to the Windows environment A WARNING Improperly removing a USB drive can cause data to be lost or corrupted To remove the USB flash drive from the DX8000 1 Click File Unplug Eject Hardware The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box opens 2 Select the USB flash drive in the Hardware devices list 3 Click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog box opens 4 Selectthe USB device 5 Click OK 6 Wait for the DX8000 to respond with a message stating that it is safe to remove the USB device from the DX8000 Removing a USB flash drive before the DX8000 acknowledges that it is safe to remove the USB device might result in lost or corrupted data 7 Remove the USB flash drive C624M C 5 06 93 ENABLING THE DEINTERLACING FILTER Images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second might move or tear The DX8000 provides a global option for enabling deinterlacing filtering to enhance the exported image for 4CIF recorded channels In this case the exported image is converted to 2CIF resolution This setting is effective for all channels and cannot be set for enabling individual channels For more information about the viewing video in the deinterlaced mode refer to Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode on page 90
277. splay card for automatic camera mapping 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click This icon appears only if the optional MUX display card has been installed The External Output page is displayed 3 Inthe Auto Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a Select the Auto Camera Mapping Mode radio button b Select of the screen division options c Select dwell time 1 to 60 seconds from the drop down box This is the amount of time each window will remain on the monitor d Select the type of event that will be allowed to override the monitor output e Alarm input e Motion detection e Set the dwell time an event will be allowed to override the screen 1 60 seconds 4 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page 3b External Output e Auto Camera Mapping Mode ems EA e lime 10 y 1 B0 Seconds Override monitor output in response to this type of event Mation detection zl Motion alarm override dwell time 10e 7 1 60Seconds Figure 134 External Monitor Automatic Mapping Setting Up Manual Camera Mapping Manual camera mapping allows a user to customize the MUX display card output Individual cameras can be assigned to view panels in any combination Each customized screen can be added to a sequence list and assigned a specific amount of dwell time These combinations of customized screens and corresponding dwell times mak
278. splay the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to access the programming features of remote cameras and includes the following topics e Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 51 e Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 52 Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control The DX8000 allows you to navigate the menu system of remote cameras using the PTZ OSD Menu control The PTZ OSD Menu control is available when the DX8000 is in Live View mode The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View Alternative methods to navigate the remote camera menu system are as follows e Keypad controls For information on using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 52 e Keyboard keys For information on using the keyboard keys refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 45 The following figure shows the PTZ OSD Menu control Figure 26 PTZ OSD Menu C624M C 5 06 51 52 The following table describes the parts of the PTZ OSD Menu control Table Q Parts of the PTZ OSD Menu Control Item Part Description O Enter Provides the following actions e A
279. ssssssssss ss I n 177 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address oooooooocococococcoro rr IR ele 179 Finding Active Remote Cameras 180 Activatihig Remote E Bs esten o oro CER ode e quet s inet te e d ems HEU e allele 181 Modifying a Remote Ste sense o pqr agen eR RENE CARI eh OhE Reedy el Asien nu SPA ARE SU TAM SEEN NNI 181 Editing a Remote Sita eso sets ot veo goo ete mtb ete Sauce ek DOE as tok bale oid me durae retta 181 Deletirig a REMOTE SHE at A A PUR Y E eer als EL Bee ee RN E 181 SVSEEImSetUp c ss ce O dete ta len uS a tede ate Lo Alt le cal Ne eA mM I LE T e M nme e due 182 Accessing the System Pade euet de oo wai E quem ME ee A VAT Du ONE ESAE ER ROL 182 Working with the Export Feature 182 Exporting Current DVR Settlfgs s accom oen ete a Ee rua deed 182 Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export iiiiisssssssssssssssssssss sse e e n 183 WorkingWith the lmport Feature tm oct tu dI Lbs e Lie pL fa id eiie d here em is iba 184 Importing DVR Settings 184 Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Import iiiiisssissssssssssssssess s s m n e ees 184 Using System Lgs ote A A MUDITQCLA PUR ENERO RON IB RU qa eta 185 MIGWIFIQ di Log Flea aa aici cea ni ri ene nne OU oo am de acc eee MI Anm LE Ee Mode aee coitu 185 Exporting Log intonation e ee Rer LE tee e ES aged hie NY IRIS MOS eH PAMELA 187 Sel amp cting ttie banguage avian ott dose ko tpe hh toa Wee EAS MS ioci KS Laptop ade ra d On 187 Setting the System IME s s s
280. ssssssssssssss I nnn n ees 29 LU BT RUSSIE a a A e di 31 Assigning Cameras to View Panes 32 Setting Up Links o e a a acdy dag nbs dada debe cda ds 32 Manually Turning a Relay On and Off ooo 33 Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera ooo 33 Linking a Relay Output to a Camera 33 Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs iiiiiiiisiissssssssssssssssee III e e 33 Removing LINKS acota oo gnc eme br EE ida aerea 34 Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera iiiisssisssssssssssssssssss e e 34 Removing a Linked Relay Output from a Camera iiiissiissssssssssssssssss e 34 Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input 2 20 00 ccc ccc ccc e 34 C624M C 5 06 3 Working in Live View Mode em meer ceder ir ts et 35 Assigning Cameras to View Panes wt cui os teer Neos a ERI Ue espe TE TR PUPPES TENUIT EEG 35 Setting UD FaVgrites 35 sto oh etes e eut fh ce E ihe EE Gata elle 35 Addinig Carmera Vie WTOESVOTIES ee A DIA XE RE Meee Pd OCURRE AE ae AES Nic IUE 35 Orgatizing Favorites In Falders seas et e ate rte cst ate e cs e a mette brute use etel 36 Greating Favorites Folder ci A Hte AIRE NT AENEIS RU A MEER ae UC qu epa 36 Organizing Favorites In Folders e risa o e de Ee POR Reb e tt e e Mb e otim 37 live View On Screen Display OSD 2 5 hse d dioe Yee Me ite etse pA ut uicti Saeed ieee Rue 38 Customizing the On Screen Display OSD iiisisiissssssssssssssssssssss II e nne 39 Instant REC
281. sure your system is set up correctly NOTES e Touse emergency e mail notification the DX8000 Series DVR must be connected to a local area network LAN that maintains an SMTP mail server The network must also be connected to either an intranet or the Internet depending on the location of the e mail accounts to which you want to send notifications Consult your network administrator for information on configuring e mail notification on your local network e DX8000 version 2 0 does not support Google Gmail This section describes how to set up emergency e mail notification and includes the following topics e Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setup on page 198 e Configuring Emergency E Mail Notification on page 201 e Setting Up the Time Period on page 204 e Sending E Mail Notifications on page 210 ACCESSING THE EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION SETUP To access the emergency e mail notification setup 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab CONFIGURING EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION This section describes how to set up emergency e mail notification and includes the following topics Enabling or Disabling E Mail Notification on page 201 e Setting Up the E Mail Server on page 202 e Testing E Mail Notification on page 203 Enabling or Disabling E Mail Notification To enab
282. t in response to a video loss event detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset radio button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 for the camera to move to e To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to video loss input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern radio button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Click Apply Video Loss Link Settings Video Loss Channel CAMERAQI Camera Name E amera 1 Linked PTZ Setting Linked Camera Charnel came ao 2 RAO gt Linked Camera Preset PRESETO1 y Linked Camera Pattern TETA z Figure 87 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events 121 SCHEDULE SETUP 122 The DX8000 provides extensive scheduling capabilities Flexible recording schedules can be established for daily weekday weekend or individual day recording Recording time can be broken up into increments of one half hour and each increment can be scheduled to record continuously or in response to an alarm motion or ATM POS event Users with Power User access and higher can create recording schedules This section describes how to setup recording schedules and inclu
283. t with the serial number and order number or invoice number on which the unit was originally purchased as well as the MAC address and exact date time listed on the password recovery screen on the DX8000 needing a reset This must be done in writing or fax and the request must be accompanied by a letter from the current owner of the system stating the following information under penalty of perjury e Heorsheis the legal owner of the system e he password for the system was lost e Thathe or she is requesting a password reset Pelco will then issue a reset code that can be used for 24 hours on the DX8000 with the provided MAC address only Please fax in all the information the exact time the mac address and so forth on the password recovery screen on your local DX8000 unit on company letterhead if possible with the above information Fax to 888 294 3885 attention DX8000 password recovery To recover a lost or forgotten Admin password 1 From the DX8000 menu choose File gt Password Recovery The Password Recovery dialog box appears Password Recovery E xi Q MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Date Time Tuesday February 24 2004 12 39 59 Crack key 8b OK Cancel Figure 153 Password Recovery Dialog Box 2 Contact Pelco Product Support with the following information a MAC address as it appears in the Password Recovery dialog box b Current date for your location as it appears in the Passwor
284. the DX8000 system time and includes the following topics e Setting System Time on page 188 e Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time on page 188 C624M C 5 06 187 188 Setting System Time Pelco recommends that the system time be configured only at the DX8000 server System page In this case if a subsequent attempt is made to set the system clock to a time earlier than the current time the DX8000 server will display the Confirm dialog box alerting the user that the system clock is being set to a time earlier than the current system time and prompt the user to do one of the following e Accept the new system time and delete data recorded between the current time and the newly set time If this option is accepted the data is deleted and the DX8000 automatically restarts e Accept the new system time with the following conditions Previously recorded data will not be deleted The DX8000 will not record new data until the system time becomes greater than the time that data was previously recorded In this case the time data was last recorded before the system time was reset to an earlier value For example if data was recorded at 3 00 p m and at 3 00 p m the system time was reset to 2 30 p m the DX8000 will not commence recording again until the system time advances past 3 00 p m However if the user changes the system time from the Windows Control Panel the data recording protection feature described above i
285. the Device Name text box Set the date and time range for the search In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Line Item The Line Item text box is available b Type the name of the line item in the text box Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid transactions containing the line item are displayed in the POS Search Table In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 85 86 Live Start for 13 2006 o7 26 00 3 End for 13 2006 s ord 47 d 00 Transaction Information Device Name ETMS ilo Transaction Number m Data Information Transaction with Exception Only e IV Line Item CHIPS Action Code cu zi Exception Code BANANA Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable T TRANSACTION NUMBER 556 DATE 1 13 2006 TIME 7 26 19 2 ATM POSO1 556 2006 1 13 7 26 19 No ATM POSO1 2006 1 13 7 26 29 BAKED CHIPS 3 48 ATM POSOL 2006 1 13 7 26 59 FROEN CORN es ATM POSO1 2006 1 13 7 27 9 SUB TOTAL E 6 25 ATM POSO1 2006 1 13 7 27 33 Tae 4050 ATM POSO1 2006 1 13 7 28 59 TOTAL 6 76 ATM POSO1 2006 1 13 7 43 54 Figure 54 Transactions that Contain a Unique Line Item SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS BY ACTION CODE The DX8000 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions by action code To use an action code to search transactio
286. the asterisk wildcard Search by a single word or multiple words appearing in a transaction line Enter the first few characters of the first word appearing in the transaction and the wildcard As an example for a line item containing the entry small orange juice enter sma The search returns all transactions that contain the word small Enter the first few characters of the second word in a transaction and the wildcard As an example for a line item containing the entry small orange juice enter ora The search returns all transactions that contain the word orange Search by abbreviation An an example for a line item containing the entry Soda 6 pk enter 6 pk The search returns all transactions that contain the abbreviation 6 pk To search for transactions that contain a unique line item C624M C 5 06 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click Ife On the Search control click OM The POS search view is displayed To select a ATM POS device do one of the following e n the DX8000 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected Dothe following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in
287. tion data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data The DX8000 allows you to configure unique exceptions for each ATM POS device from the following e ATM POS device selection drop down box e Exception table that contains the name and effect of each exception you create e Action code drop down box that contains exception action codes e User mapping table where you create the string for the action code Use the Advanced tab to configure exceptions Entries are case sensitive For each defined data device ATM device or POS terminal you can specify up to 31 data exceptions A field left blank is not used in the exception Any fields containing values must all be found or satisfied before a data device exception is generated Each data device can trigger the DX8000 to record at special rates and for a special length of time as determined in the Record On Data Exceptions screen This section describes how to work with exceptions and includes the following topics e Using Action Codes on page 155 e Creating an ATM POS Exception on page 157 e Editing an ATM POS Exception on page 158 e Deleting an ATM POS Exception on page 159 e Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device on page 159 Using Action Codes To use an action code to search transaction data the action code must be create first before recording the transaction data If the
288. to map to or disconnect from a network drive You need to know what letters are already assigned to drives and the path to the folder you want to map to To map a network drive 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen opens 3 Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens 4 Click Map a network drive The Map Network Drive dialog box opens asking for a drive letter and path 5 In the Drive drop down box select a drive letter that is not being used 6 Type the path in the Folder drop down box NP address of serverMolder name is an example 7 Optional Click the Reconnect at logon box if you do not want the mapped drive to remain connected each time you log on 8 Click Finish The newly mapped drive is added as a remote drive and is displayed in the Device area of the Export Video dialog box The mapped drive can now be accessed just like a local drive DISCONNECTING FROM A NETWORK DRIVE To disconnect from a network drive 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click qt The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen opens 3 Click Disconnect mapped drive The Disconnect Network Drive dialog box opens 4 Select the network drive you want to disconnect 5 Click OK The drive is disconnected and removed from the Export Video dialog box s Device area C6
289. totimeout 10 Sec l Video Loss Detectio Dip Switch Address None z Cony Video Loss Loss of synchronization El nw laval af widen p Picture Adjustment Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time Biais Y Current Value A 127 0 4128 0 Start Time pama End Time 323 Ea Contrast 7 127 4128 D Apply to All Cameras Hue Iv Protocol v Motion Detection 127 Saturation e j M Camera Security Iv Audio Settings 427 0 128 0 IV Picture Adjustment IV Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras Cancel Apply 107 108 AUDIO SETUP The DX8 000 audio feature allows you to configure individual camera channels to listen to and record live audio You can monitor live audio at a local server or listen to live audio from a remote DX8000 server or client system You can play back audio recorded by a camera channel To use the DX8000 s audio features the optional DX8000 AUD audio card must be installed You can determine if the audio card is installed by checking the Audio option status in the Channel Information section of the Camera page The Audio status is one of the following e No installed e Installed enabled The DX8 000 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio may not be of the same quality as live audio Consult your Pelco sales representative for more information regarding the DX8000 AUD option To set up audio for a camera 1 Do a C 2 On the following Install
290. ts of the POS Search View Item Part Description 1 Date Date range for which to search the video and data O Time Time range based on a 24 hour time period for searching POS events Transaction Information Allows POS search by transaction information options as follows Device Name The ATM POS device linked to a specific camera In this case selecting a camera linked to an ATM POS device automatically inserts the name of the ATM POS device in the Device Name box Transaction Number A number assigned by the ATM POS device that is printed on the sales are transaction receipt Data Information Allows POS search by data information options as follows Transaction with Exception Only Finds all transactions for which an exception is defined Line Item Allows you to search POS data by a specific transaction line item based on the following guidelines Line item entries are not case sensitive Enter lower or uppercase characters Specify the asterisk wildcard Search by a single word or multiple words appearing in a transaction line Enter the first few characters of the first word appearing in the transaction and the wildcard As an example for a line item containing the entry small orange juice enter sma The search returns all transactions that contain the word small Enter the first few characters of the second word in a transaction and the wildcard As an example for a line item c
291. tup advanced alarm and motion relay output and includes the following topics e Configuring Advanced Motion Activated Relay Output on page 139 e Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output on page 140 e Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output on page 141 e Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output on page 142 C624M C 5 06 Configuring Advanced Motion Activated Relay Output To configure a motion relay output 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click il The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens The Schedule page is displayed 4 Click the Motion tab 5 Configure each relay that is linked to a camera a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Selecta relay timing value from the Activation Period drop down box 6 Click Save 7 Click Exit Ci A 0 x Motion Alarm ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay 04 tput Activation Period CameraD1 Relay 01 y 3 Seconds Camera02 Relay 03 13 Seconds CameraD3 CameraD4 9 Camera 5 No Link Camera0l6 No Link v No Link Cameral No Link Y No Link Camera08 No Link Y No Link y To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt motion gt in the linking setup Figure 104 Linking Relays to Motion Detection The following table describes the availa
292. uble click the Data Format cell for the selected ATM POS device The Data Format cell drop down box is displayed Click in the Data Format cell to display the available data formats Select the data format you want to assign to the ATM POS device Do one of the following e Click Apply to confirm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box e Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page Available ATM POS Device De ATM POS Name ATM POS DataForm t Protocol Gg W1 aATM POSO1 1 ER 650 y POS GENERAL ATM POSO2 um None O3 ATM Poso3 3 None D 4 TM PO0504 4 None LER O5 ATM Poso5 5 None None O6 TM POS06 5 None None D arM P0507 7 None None Os atm Posos 8 None None O9 arM POs08 3 None None O10 arM POS10 10 None None O11 arM POST 11 None None O12 ATM POS12 12 None None O13 ATM POS13 13 None None O14 aTmM POS14 14 None None O15 ATM POS15 15 None None O16 ATM POS16 16 None None WARNING If a device is set to the single mode only one device can be assigned to the connection port Figure 112 Assigning a Data Format to An ATM POS Device C624M C 5 06 Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions An exception is a predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data Exceptions are configured on the Advanced page To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be create first before recording the transac
293. udio at the local server 1 9 10 Connect head phones to the DX8000 audio output connector For information about setting up the DX8000 server to record and listen to live audio refer to Audio Setup on page 108 On the DX8000 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel that is configured for live audio recording In the Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not selected Click Apply Verify that you can hear sound from the DX8000 audio output On the DX8000 toolbar click EX Drag a camera configured to record live audio from the Site tree onto a view pane Verify that you can hear live audio Listening to Live Audio from a Remote DX8000 System To listen to live audio at a remote DX8000 server or client system f 2 C624M C 5 06 On the DX8000 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available For information about setting up the DX8000 server to record and listen to live audio refer to Audio Setup on page 108 In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel that is configured for live audio recording In the Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not s
294. ult Disable Relay will not activate when a video loss event occurs Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact same time the video loss event happens 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the video loss event occurs C624M C 5 06 SETTING UP NETWORK PROPERTIES The DX8000 networking capability allows you to network up to five DX8000 together You can configure such networking options as follows e Configuring the DX8000 for Network Access e Setting Up DHCP e Setting Up a Static IP Address e Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle e Setting Up DNS WINS e Setting Up COM1 and COM2 Port Properties This section describes how to set up DX8000 network communication and includes the following topics e Configuring the DX8000 for Network Access on page 143 e Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle on page 145 e Accessing Network Information on page 146 e Setting Up DNS WINS on page 146 CONFIGURING THE DX8000 FOR NETWORK ACCESS Using the TCP IP protocol up to five DX8000 Series DVRs can be networked together for remote viewing and management In addition up to five simultaneous PC web and mobile clients can connect to each DVR The DX8000 Series DVR supports both static IP addressing and dynamic addressing through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Consult your network administrator for more information on IP address configuration The system must be turned on
295. ure shows the Site tree D 49 Dxeooo El Camera B Camera 1 85 er Eo bo Lo oo Lo Lo Lo Lo amp Lo amp 6 A A A w O Normal Rec x240 J Camera 3 J Camera 4 J Camera 5 J Camera 6 J Camera J Camera 8 J Camera 9 J Camera 10 J Camera 11 J Camera 12 J Camera 13 J Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 O o Alarm 9 lab edb ATMIPOS amp Relay 0 Figure 6 Site tree Parts The following table describes the Site tree parts Table M Site tree Parts Item Part Description following commands to log into the DX8000 site e Connect e Disconnect 1 Name Site Expands and collapses the DX8000 site Right clicking the site name opens a shortcut menu that provides the e User Log In Clicking User Log In opens the User Log In dialog box where you enter your user name and password e Userlog Out Clicking logs you out of the DX8000 site Camera Expands and collapses the Camera tree e Recording mode gi e Recording resolution Recording frame rate e Recording Image quality o Channel information Displays icons that represent the configuration for the camera o O Alarm Expands and collapses the Alarm tree o g ATM POS Expands and collapses the ATM POS tree C624M C 5 06 31 32 Table M Site tree Parts Continued Item Part Description O Relay Expands and collapses the Relay tree Right c
296. us key pressed once increases the camera s pan and tilt speed The minus key pressed once decreases the camera s pan and tilt speed Each time the plus key is pressed the pan and tilt speed is increased toward the maximum speed Each time the minus key is pressed the pan and tilt speed is decreased toward the minimum speed To use the keyboard and keys to control camera pan and tilt speed 1 On the DX8000 toolbar click 4 2 Select a PTZ enabled camera from the Site tree C624M C 5 06 3 Click the mouse pointer in the camera s view panel 4 Press and hold the up down and left right arrows to pan and tilt the camera 5 Press the plus key once or more to increase the pan and tilt speed Press the minus key once or more to decrease the pan and tilt speed 45 PTZ PRESETS 46 A preset is a user defined camera position using pan and tilt zoom and focus commands camera s auto focus option must be off Only cameras that support positioning and programming using D P or Coaxitron protocols can use this feature The DX8000 Series DVR can address up to 32 PTZ presets 1 32 Preset 95 is reserved for remote camera setup and preset 99 is reserved for camera autoscan mode The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8000 menu bar
297. ut page is displayed The Ext Monitor page is displayed SETTING UP CAMERA MAPPING The DX8000 allows you to set up automatic or manual camera mapping This sections describes how to set up camera mapping and includes the following topics e Setting Up Automatic Camera Mapping on page 191 e Setting Up Manual Camera Mapping on page 192 Setting Up Automatic Camera Mapping Automatic camera mapping offers a simplified method for configuring the second bottom output on the optional MUX display card Video from each camera source will be automatically cycled across the monitor s view panels In automatic mode all cameras will be displayed sequentially starting with Camera 1 and continuing through Camera 16 depending on your system s configuration The automatic camera mapping feature includes the following stipulations e The automated sequence will be interrupted each time a motion or alarm event is detected e When the DVR detects an event either motion or alarm it will switch the monitor output to display the camera source that detected the event The amount of time the event channel overrides the automated sequence can be set between 1 and 60 seconds Eight channel DVRs offer only the 1x1 2x2 and 3x3 view panel options If you select more than one screen division each camera channel will cycle through each screen before the next panel division is presented C624M C 5 06 181 To configure the second bottom output on the di
298. ve Mode Allows all users to view live video e Playback Mode Allows users with Standard User access and higher are allowed to play back recorded video Search Enters the Search mode and opens the search window providing access to search features Users with a Standard User access and higher are allowed to search video data using specific criteria Setup Enters the setup mode and opens the Setup dialog box to the Camera setup page default view and allows access to the other setup pages Users with Power User access and higher are allowed to set up the features and options for the DVR SWITCHING BETWEEN STANDARD AND EXTENDED PANEL VIEWS The DX8000 features a viewing area that can be expanded to fill a larger portion of the main window Extended view expands the viewable panel containing camera panes but hides the timeline PTZ digital zoom and playback controls To use the timeline PTZ digital zoom and playback controls you must take the DX8000 out of extended view To switch back and forth between standard and extended view From the DX8000 menu bar choose View gt Extended View UNDERSTANDING VIEW PANES AND PANELS 26 This section describes the DX8000 viewing area The viewing area is organized into panes and panels much like a window contains panes Video from each camera is displayed in its own viewing pane This section includes the following topics e Working with View Pane and Panel on page 26 e Configuri
299. viewing17 19 playback viewing17 video compression134 video loss detection of110 emergency notification198 relay output linking to115 synchronization loss of110 video level low110 video low level1 10 view cycle view setup23 dwell time23 extended26 pane panel See pane panel standard26 viewing area See pane panel C624M C 5 06 W warranty period14 wildcard character85 wildcard character85 wiper operating54 Z zones motion detection107 zoom adjusting camera44 C624M C 5 06 225 PRODUCT WARRANTY AND RETURN INFORMATION WARRANTY Pelco will repair or replace without charge any merchandise proved defective in material or workmanship for a period of one year after the date of shipment Exceptions to this warranty are as noted below Five years on FR FT FS Series fiber optic products and TW3000 Series unshielded twisted pair transmission products hree years on Genex Series products multiplexers server and keyboard hree years on Camclosure and fixed camera models except the CC3701H 2 CC3701H 2X CC3751H 2 CC3651H 2X MC3651H 2 and MC3651H 2X camera models which have a five year warranty hree years on PMCL200 300 400 Series LCD monitors wo years on standard motorized or fixed focal length lenses Two years on Legacy CM6700 CM6800 CM9700 Series matrix and DF5 DF8 Series ixed dome products wo years on Spectra Esprit ExSite and PS20 scanners including when used in ontinuou
300. wn box Click the e mail address of the user you want to edit Click Edit The E mail Settings dialog box opens In the Group drop down box select a different group for the user If necessary enter a new e mail address for the user in the E mail Address text box Click OK Click Apply C Disable Notification Enable Notification Full name E mail Address To Subject fasmith peleo com Add to Group mid E Po Add to Group a Jism Department 7 0x000 Emergency E mail Notification r Mail Group E mail Security Department 2 5 Security Department Security Department Group I gt Delete Edit Manage Groups Figure 143 Modify Member Attributes 209 210 SENDING E MAIL NOTIFICATIONS This section describes how to send e mail notifications and includes the following topics Sending E Mail Notifications to Individuals on page 210 Sending E Mail Notifications to Groups on page 211 Sending E Mail Notifications to Individuals To configure e mail notification to send alerts to an individual 1 2 On the DX8000 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Do the following Enter the e mail address of the individual to whom you would like to send e mail notifications in the To text box
301. wn dialog box opens 2 Select Shut down 3 Click OK DX8000 DOCUMENTATION You can print selected technical documentation free directly from the Internet To access technical documentation 1 Goto http www pelco com products The Pelco Products Web page is displayed 2 Scroll to the Control Site Equipment section and click Video Recorders The Control Site Equipment Digital Video Recorders Web page is displayed 3 Scroll to the DX8000 and locate the specific document you want to view or print Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to open the document search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers Go to www adobe com to download a free copy of Acrobat Reader C624M C 5 06 15 Logging In to the DX8000 Application To access the features of the DX8000 Series DVR you must log in with a valid user name and password The DX8000 comes equipped with a built in user account named Guest Fach time the unit is turned on the Guest account is automatically activated In addition to the Guest account there are four other user access levels or groups that can be configured on the DX8000 The Guest user is granted only limited access to the system The other four access levels range from the Administrator group with the most rights and privileges to the Restricted group with the least rights and privileges To operate and configure all but the most basic features of the DX8000 you must be assigned a user account
302. x opens 212 C624M C 5 06 oren 0s Look in JENOx8000 AD1 dx8000sw_ 2_0_00_1170 DX8000 Server 2 0 0 Up File name setup exe Files of type Setup Execute File exe E Cancel Figure 148 Open Dialog Box 4 Navigate to and select the update file 5 Click Open The Select Upgrade Package dialog box becomes active Select Upgrade Package EE mi x r Package Information Version 2 0 00 1170 Package Date 12 15 2005 04 53 11 File Path E NDX8000 AD 1Nd 8000sw 2 O0 DO 1170 NDX8000 Ser Package Selected JESDxB000 ADT dx8000sw_ 2_0_00_1170 D Figure 149 Upgrade Package Information 6 Click Next The Select Server dialog box opens The Select Server dialog box displays a list of all connected DX8000s including the local DVR Updates can be made to the local server and all connected remote servers from this dialog box 7 Select the DVR server you want to update e Toupdate the local DVR select site name of your system from the Select Server list Refer to Figure 150 and Figure 151 e Toupdate a remote DVR select its site name from the Select Server list and then click Connect Refer to the following figure C624M C 5 06 213 214 CET ll Server Information Server Name local DVA IP Adress Local System Current Status Local System upgrade available m Select to Server List 2 Dx8000 Building 7 ri DX8000 Building 3 Loading Dock Ivi DX000 Building
303. xisting site from the site list 1 2 C624M C 5 06 Select the site name you want to delete from the Site IP list by clicking its site name Click Delete Click OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the deletion Click Apply 181 SYSTEM SETUP 182 Users with Power User access and higher can save configuration settings for the DX8000 using the system export feature Previously saved settings can be loaded into the DVR using system import This section describes how to configure system options and parameters and includes the following topics e Accessing the System Page on page 182 e Working with the Export Feature on page 182 e Working with the Import Feature on page 184 e Using System Logs on page 185 e Selecting the Language on page 187 e Setting the System Time on page 187 e Selecting the Video Format on page 189 e Working with Ctrl Alt Del Function on page 189 e Setting Up Auto Reboot on page 190 e Working with Online Help on page 190 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM PAGE To access the System page 1 Onthe DX8000 toolbar click Ist The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click qa The System page is displayed WORKING WITH THE EXPORT FEATURE The DX8000 provides an import and export feature that allows you to save and reload DX8000 configuration settings You can save your DX8000 DVR configuration settings by exporting them to a specific storage media and location You can reload a specific configurations profile
304. y Frame Reverse button Frame By Frame Forward Each frame is displayed in the forward direction with each click of the Frame by Frame Forward button Fast Forward to End Advances the bookmark to the end of the latest recorded video Play Forward Initiates normal playback of recorded video in the forward direction Stop Stops playback control activity and returns to the Live View mode Pause Pauses video playback in the forward or reverse direction Play Reverse Initiates normal playback of recorded video in the reverse direction o00000 0 Rewind to Beginning Returns the bookmark to the start of the earliest recorded video 62 C624M C 5 06 The following figure shows the DX8000 playback speed and volume controls Gy Figure 37 Playback Speed and Volume Controls The following table describes the parts of the playback speed and volume controls Table U Parts of the Playback Speed and Volume Controls Item Part Description O Normal Playback speed is at normal rate o Faster Playback speed is increased to a faster rate Slower Playback speed is reduced to a slower rate o Louder Volume is increased to a higher level or decreased to a lower level o Mute Volume is silenced C624M C 5 06 63 PLAYBACK TIMELINE 64 Panel 1 8 S03 C09 Camera 9 11 27 2003 Y o5 2 00 amp 56 S
305. y output Drag the relay outside the Site tree panel and then release the mouse button Repeat the above process for each relay you want to remove C624M C 5 06 Working in Live View Mode This section describes how to use the DX8000 to view and record live video All users can view live video from the main window Users with Standard User access and higher can operate the on screen PTZ controls To view live video in the DX8000 main window On the DX8000 toolbar click Live This section includes the following topics e Assigning Cameras to View Panes on page 35 e live View On Screen Display OSD on page 38 e Customizing the On Screen Display OSD on page 39 ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANES To assign a camera to the view pane 1 Drag a camera from the Site tree onto a view pane 2 Repeat the process in step 1 for up to 36 cameras from up to five different DX8000 sites For information about the DX8000 view pane and panels refer to the following topics e Working with View Pane and Panel on page 26 e Configuring View Panels on page 27 e Navigating View Panels on page 27 SETTING UP FAVORITES The DX8000 Favorites menu allows you to organize and save camera views For example you might want to display camera views that show the delivery gate entrance for buildings 1 4 7 and 12 during the hours of 06 00 to 07 30 and another camera view that displays the front lobby of building 1 16 at 08 00 This section describ
306. ystem allows you quick access to information about how to configure and operate the DX8000 server and DX8000 client application The DX8000 also supports the following PC based applications e DX8000 Client Emergency Agent on page 13 e DX8000 Viewer on page 13 e DX8000 Mobile Client on page 13 e DX8000 Web Client on page 13 DX8000 CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENT The DX8000 Client Emergency Agent works with networked DX8000 Series digital video recorders to alert users when one or more particular channels detect a motion and or alarm event The Emergency Agent runs on a networked client PC DX8000 VIEWER The DX8000 Viewer is capable of playing back a variety of video still image and audio media formats It is designed to recognize and verify the digital watermark that is embedded in DX8000 Series digital video recorder native video Watermarking is used to authenticate the originality of a video file and to alert users of possible image tampering The viewer application runs automatically each time a CD or DVD created by the DX8000 s export feature is inserted into a Windows based PC The software can also be installed on a PC and opened independently when necessary DX8000 MOBILE CLIENT The DX8000 Mobile Client allow you to view live video remotely from multiple cameras and sites Networking capabilities include local connection using wire bound or wireless LAN technologies or remote connection using the Internet The DX8000 Mobile Client softw

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Ergotron 45-358-026 flat panel wall mount    Manuel - Foster S.p.A.  XL Vu VideoProbe  93 aerosol aerossol aérosols σπρει  US Sunlight 1914ST Installation Guide  資料2 環境保全型農業直接支払制度の概要（PDF：1043KB）  Benutzerhinweise für die Feuerwehrhelme H1500 www  PRO CS-80E - MDS Electronics  USER MANUAL LÄMPÖÄSSÄ T 40 - 80 / P 40 - 80  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file